JP7186473B1 - playground - Google Patents

Abstract

A game machine having a characteristic effect means is provided. When a door body is in an open state and a detection state of a detection means is an open detection state (first state), display of a management display can be started when a certain operation is performed. , in the first state in which the reels are rotating, even if the certain operation is performed, the management display is not started to be displayed. Further, in the first state and the state in which the reels are rotating and in the state in which the certain operation is being performed, when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode by the stop button, There is a case where the prize-winning effect is ended before the display of the management display is started, and the game effect is interrupted when the display of the management display is started. [Selection drawing] Fig. 15

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a pinball game machine (pachinko machine), a reel game machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as one of game machines such as slot machines and pachinko machines, there is a game machine equipped with various production means (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2005-296354 A

However, the conventional game machine has room for improvement in the production means.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having a characteristic effect means.

A game machine according to the present invention comprises a production means, a door body provided on the front surface of the game machine that can be opened and closed, a detection means capable of detecting the open/closed state of the door body, and an operation means capable of performing a certain operation. , a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate; and a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels. wherein the effect means is capable of executing a game effect, the effect means is capable of executing a winning effect according to the stop mode of the plurality of reels, and the detection means is capable of executing the door means capable of changing the detection state to the closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state, and the detection means can change the detection state to the open detection state when the door body is in the open state. and a detection state of the detection means is set to the closed detection state even when the door body is in the open state by performing a predetermined operation on the detection means. The rendering means includes display means, and the display means is means capable of displaying a management display for an administrator, and the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection. In a state (hereinafter referred to as a "first state"), when the certain operation is performed, the management display can be started to be displayed, and in the first state, the reel is In the rotating state, even if the certain operation is performed, the display of the management display is not started, and in the first state and the state in which the reels are rotating, When the plurality of reels are stopped in a first stop mode by the stop button while the certain operation is being performed, the management display is configured to start to be displayed. When the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode by the stop button in one state in which the reels are rotating and the certain operation is being performed, the winning a prize The game machine is characterized in that the management display is started after the performance is executed to the end and terminated , and the game performance is interrupted along with the start of the management display .

According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game machine having a characteristic presentation means.

1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. 2 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 opened. FIG. It shows a circuit block diagram of a control unit. (a) is a plan view showing an array of symbols provided on each reel (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112). (b) A diagram showing types of winning combinations (including activated combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and activation or payout of each winning combination. 4 is a flow chart showing a flow of main processing of a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing the flow of initial setting processing; 7 is a flowchart showing the flow of setting change processing; 7 is a flow chart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing; 4 is a flowchart showing the flow of device monitoring processing; 7 is a flowchart showing the flow of setting value confirmation processing; 10 is a flow chart showing the flow of another device monitoring process; (A) It is the figure which showed the flow of setting change mode in a time series. (B) It is the figure which showed the flow of setting confirmation mode in a time series. (A) It is the figure which showed the flow of the display example 1 of the management screen in time series. (B) is a diagram showing the flow of display example 2 of the management screen in chronological order. (A) It is the figure which showed the flow of the display example 3 of the management screen in time series. (B) is a diagram showing the flow of display example 4 of the management screen in chronological order. (A) is a diagram showing the flow of display example 5 of the management screen in chronological order. (B) is a diagram showing the flow of display example 6 of the management screen in chronological order. (A) is a diagram showing the flow of error notification display example 1 in chronological order. (B) is a diagram showing the flow of error notification display example 2 in chronological order. (A) It is the figure which showed the flow of the example 1 of a display of a management screen and an error notification in time series. (B) is a diagram showing the flow of display example 2 of the management screen and the error notification in chronological order. (A) is a diagram showing the flow of setting history display in chronological order. (B) is a diagram showing the flow of error history display in chronological order. (A) is a diagram showing the flow of volume adjustment in time series when the management screen is not displayed. (B) is a diagram showing the flow of volume adjustment in a time series when the management screen is displayed. It is a simple game flow showing the game state of the AT system. (a) It is the figure which showed the example of transition of the production|presentation state in an advantageous area. (b) It is the figure which showed an example of the CZ determination table used for CZ lottery in a normal stage. (c) A diagram showing an example of a CZ determination table used for a CZ lottery during stock time. It is a diagram showing an example of production in stock time in chronological order. It is a diagram showing an example of production in a normal stage in chronological order. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of winning lines of the slot machine 100. FIG. It shows a circuit block diagram of a control unit. FIG. 4 is a plan view showing an array of symbols provided on each reel (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112). It is a diagram showing types of winning combinations, names of condition devices, symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, number of payouts, and remarks. (a) It is a diagram showing the symbol combination, the number of payouts, and remarks corresponding to the small winning combination 3 (push-order bell) and the small winning combination 5 (one-piece winning combination). (b) It is a diagram showing the relationship between the pressing order of the stop buttons 137 to 139 in the game in which the small win 3 (pressing order bell) is internally won and the AT game. (c) It is a diagram showing the relationship between the pressing order of the stop buttons 137 to 139 and the setting suggestion effect A in the game in which the small winning combination 5 (one-piece winning combination) is internally won. (a) It is a time chart showing an example of the game period of the high-probability mode and the low-probability mode of the setting suggestion effect A. FIG. (b) A diagram showing an example of a setting suggestion effect A selection table used in the setting suggestion effect A lottery. (a) It is a time chart showing an example of the game period of the high-probability mode and low-probability mode of the setting suggestion effect B. FIG. (b) A diagram showing an example of a setting suggestion effect B selection table used for the setting suggestion effect B lottery. 4 is a flow chart showing a flow of main processing of a main controller; 7 is a flow chart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing; (a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by a CPU 404 of a first sub-controller 400; 4B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400; (c) A flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. (a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by a CPU 504 of a second sub-controller 500; (b) A flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. (c) A flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. (d) A flowchart of image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example 1 of effect of setting suggestion effect A in chronological order; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing example 2 of effect of setting suggestion effect A in chronological order; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a setting suggestion effect B in chronological order;

<<Embodiment 1>>
A gaming table (slot machine) according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

<Overall composition>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 corresponds to an example of the game table of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 (door body) attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. And prepare. Note that the front door 102 (door body) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface are housed in the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and rotate inside the slot machine 100. configured to allow These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, an appropriate number of each pattern is printed on a belt-shaped member at equal intervals, and this belt-shaped member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form each of the reels 110 to 112 (FIG. 4 ( a) see). As for the symbols on the reels 110 to 112, the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed approximately three in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113 provided in front of each of the reels 110 to 112, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. there is

By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of multiple types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the central part of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . The backlight is desirably shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (also referred to as an index sensor; not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion is provided in the vicinity of each of the reels 110 to 112. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel is configured to pass between the light part and the light-receiving part. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotation direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbols are displayed on the winning line.

The notification lamp 123 indicates to the player that, for example, a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination) has been internally won in an internal lottery, which will be described later, or that the player is in a bonus game (during a special game state). It is a lamp that informs The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 informs the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins a replay role that is one of the winning roles in the previous game. It's a lamp to let you know. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, one card is inserted up to a maximum of three cards, two cards are inserted when the bet button 131 is depressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is depressed. It has become so. The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the specified number of medals is inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. be. On the left side of the medal slot 141, there is a cross key 193a (second operation means, upper button , down button, right button, and left button) and an OK button 193b (hereinafter collectively referred to as "cross button 193").

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The number-of-payouts display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination, and is also used as an instruction monitor for performing a pushing-order effect. In this example, the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays.

A start lever 135 (operating means) is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110 to 112 . That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons (stop buttons) 137 to 139 . The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with the reels 110 to 112, respectively. A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

Hereinafter, operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 are referred to as stop operations, the first stop operation is the first stop operation (hereinafter also referred to as "first stop" or "first stop"), and the next stop operation is the second stop. The operation (hereinafter also referred to as "second stop" or "second stop"), and the final stop operation is referred to as the third stop operation (hereinafter also referred to as "third stop" or "third stop").

Also, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations are referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel, respectively. Further, the order of stopping operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 in order to stop all of the rotating reels 110 to 112 is called an operation order (or push order).

The order of operation (push order) of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is as follows: left stop button 137 is indicated by "left or R", middle stop button 138 by "middle or C", and right stop button 139 by "right or R". , (1) left->middle->right operation order (left-center-right or LCR), (2) left->right->center operation order (left-right-center or LRC), (3) center->left->right operation order ( (Central Right Left or CLR), (4) Middle→Right→Left Operation Order (Center Right Left or CRL), (5) Right→Left→Center Operation Order (Right Left Center or RLC), (6) Right→Center→Left There are six types of operation order (right-center-left or RCL).

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and medals placed on the slot machine 100 and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 . The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 . The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A production device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the production device 160.例文帳に追加

This production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (display means) arranged behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 is displayed in front of the slot machine 100. It has a structure that appears on the player's side.

It should be noted that the display means does not have to be a liquid crystal display device, and may be a display device capable of displaying various effect images and various game information. A display, a plasma display, a reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen may be used. Also, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the entirety of the screen is configured to be visible to the player. Although the display screen is rectangular in this embodiment, it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

<Internal structure>
Next, the internal structure of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 opened.

The main body 101 is a box-shaped body surrounded by an upper plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a lower plate 264 and a rear plate 242, and having an open front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board housing case 210 containing a main control board is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation port 249 provided on the upper part of the back plate 242. Below, three reels 110-112 are arranged. On the side of the main control board housing case 210 and the reels 110 to 112, that is, on the left side plate 260, a sub control board housing case 220 containing the sub control board is arranged. In addition, an external centralized terminal board 248 connected to the main control board and outputting information of the slot machine 100 to an external device is attached to the side plate 260 on the right side.

Further, inside the main body 101, a setting key switch (first operation means, also referred to as “setting key SW”, not shown) that can be switched on and off by a rotating operation is provided. The setting key SW is an operation means for starting to change or confirm settings of setting values (settings 1 to 6 in this example), which will be described later. In addition, a reset switch (hereinafter also referred to as “reset SW”) is provided inside the main body 101 so that it can be operated to change settings (set value change operation) by pressing the switch. The reset SW is an operating means that also functions as an error canceling switch that enables an operation for canceling various errors (error canceling operation) to be described later.

These setting key SW and reset SW are operating means provided at positions that can be operated only when the front door 102 (door body) is in the open state, and are operated when the front door 102 (door body) is in the closed state. is difficult or impossible to operate. In other words, it is an operating means that can be operated only by the administrator (staff, etc.) of the game parlor, and is an operating means that cannot be operated by the player.

Further, inside the main body 101, a setting value display device 101a (see FIG. 12) capable of displaying setting values is provided. In this example, the set value display device 101a is composed of a 7-segment display. Although details will be described later, when a setting change operation is performed, the setting value (any one of setting 1 to setting 6) is displayed on the setting value display device 101a, and the setting value is set by operating the start lever 135. Once the value is confirmed, the setting value is hidden. On the other hand, when the setting confirmation operation is performed, a numerical value indicating the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display device 101a.

A medal payout device 180 (a device for paying out medals accumulated in a bucket) is arranged on the lower plate 264, and a power supply device having a power supply board is provided above the medal payout device 180, that is, below the reels 110 to 112. 252 is arranged, and a power switch 244 is arranged in front of the power supply device 252 . The power supply device 252 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into DC power, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each control unit and each device such as the main control unit 300 and sub-control units 400 and 500, which will be described later. do. In addition, a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) is provided for supplying power to predetermined parts (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after external power is cut off. there is

A medal auxiliary storage box 240 is arranged on the right side of the medal dispensing device 180, and an overflow terminal is arranged behind it (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection portion for connecting a power cord 264 , and the power cord 264 connected here extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 opened in the back plate 242 of the main body 101 . there is

The front door 102 is hinged to the left side plate 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276 and is a door that can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101 .

In this example, the front door 102 locked in the closed state can be opened by inserting a key owned by the manager of the amusement arcade into the door key hole 140 (see FIG. 1). Therefore, the administrator can unlock the front door 102 (change the closed state to the open state), but a person other than the administrator (for example, a player) cannot unlock the front door 102. .

The side plate 260 on the right side of the main body 101 is provided with an optical sensor (detection means, hereinafter also referred to as an "open/close sensor", not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the front door 102 is configured to pass between the light-receiving portion and the light-receiving portion.

The main control unit 300 monitors the states of various sensors 318 including the open/close sensor in the main control timer interrupt process, which will be described later. When the front door 102 is in a closed state and the light shielding piece of the front door 102 moves to a position where the light from the light projecting part of the open/close sensor of the main body 101 is blocked, the open/close sensor outputs a signal ( For example, a low level signal) is output toward the main control unit 300 .

On the other hand, when the front door 102 is in the open state and the light shielding piece of the front door 102 moves to a position where it does not block the light from the light projecting part of the open/close sensor of the main body 101, the open/close sensor indicates that it is in the open detection state. A signal (for example, a high level signal) is output toward the main control unit 300 .

That is, the open/close sensor is a detecting means capable of detecting the open/closed state of the front door (door body) 102. When the front door 102 is closed, the detection state becomes the closed detection state, and the front door 102 is open. , the detection state becomes the open detection state.

Note that the "detection means" according to the present invention is not limited to optical sensors, and may be, for example, magnetic sensors, proximity switches, micro switches, Hall elements, and the like. Further, it is not limited to switching between the open detection state and the closed detection state as the door body is opened and closed. Conversely, even when the door is in the closed state, the detection state may be the open detection state.

Here, the opening/closing sensor according to the present example is configured so that the detection state changes to the closed detection state even when the front door (door body) 102 is in the open state by performing a predetermined operation. Specifically, when the front door 102 is in the open state, a light shielding piece of a certain length is inserted between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the open/close sensor of the main body 101 and fixed with tape or the like, and the main body is opened. By shielding the light from the light projecting part of the open/close sensor 101, even if the front door 102 is open, the detection state of the open/close sensor can be forced to the closed detection state.

The "predetermined operation" according to the present invention is not limited to this example. For example, a DIP switch may be provided to set the open/close sensor to the closed detection state, and the DIP switch may be operated as the predetermined operation. . Further, when the detection means is composed of a magnetic sensor, the detection state of the open/close sensor may be changed to the closed detection state by bringing the magnet closer.

Above the symbol display window 113, a production device 160, a production control board (not shown) for controlling the production device 160, and a speaker 272 are provided. Below the pattern display window 113, there are provided a medal selector 170 for sorting inserted medals, and a path 266 through which the medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops illegal medals onto the medal receiving tray 161. there is Furthermore, a speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 181 .

<Control section>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of a game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. and a second sub-controller 500 that controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-controller 400 .

<Main control part>
First, the main controller 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. This basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, and stopping of the reels. A ROM 306 for storing positions and the like, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. , WDT (watch dog timer) 314 are mounted. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500, which will be described later.

The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 calculates an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division. It determines and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, when the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256×47÷8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 (this circuit contains two random number generation circuits) that derives a numerical value within the range of 0 to 65535 each time it receives the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315a. and a start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338, the CPU 304 Game control is started (main control unit main processing, which will be described later, is started).

A random number generation circuit 316 generates random numbers used in the basic circuit 302 . Random number generation in the random number generation circuit 316 can be broadly divided into two methods: a counter mode and a random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that counts up (down) at predetermined time intervals is obtained and derived as a random number. There are two more methods in random mode. A first method in the random number mode uses a random number seed to perform an operation with a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function), and derives the operation result as a random number. The second method is to read numerical values from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and derive the read numerical values as random numbers. The random value generation circuit 316 uses white noise superimposed on the signals input from the various sensors 318 to the sensor circuit 320 to obtain irregular values. The random value generation circuit 316 uses the value obtained in this way as the initial value of the counter that counts up (down) in the counter mode, as the seed of the random value, or when determining the reading start position of the random number table. use.

In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) at each interrupt time. Medal reception sensor for medals, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, checkout button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from medal payout device 180, optical type of reel 110 sensors, an optical sensor of the reel 111, an optical sensor of the reel 112, an open/close sensor, etc.).

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random value generation circuit 316 . The random number generation circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect the presence or absence of passage of medals. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect the start operation by the player. A stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, and a stop button 139 are installed on each of the stop buttons 137 to 139 to detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

A bet button 130 sensor, a bet button 131 sensor, and a bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into a game. Detects a put operation when The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134 . When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180 . Each sensor described above may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The optical sensor of the reel 110, the optical sensor of the reel 111, and the optical sensor of the reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounts of the reels 110 to 112, and the light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through. It becomes L level every time. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero.

As described above, the open/close sensor is a sensor capable of detecting the open/close state of the front door (door body) 102 . When the front door 102 is closed, the open/close sensor outputs a signal (for example, a low level signal) to the CPU 304 indicating that the door is closed. On the other hand, when the front door 102 is in an open state, the open/close sensor outputs a signal (for example, a high-level signal) indicating an open detection state to the CPU 304 .

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motors provided in the reel devices 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 for driving the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 for selecting the inserted medals, and a drive circuit 324 for driving the solenoid provided in the medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 for driving a motor, various lamps 336 (a winning line display lamp 120, a notification lamp 123, a game medal insertion possible lamp 124, a re-game lamp 122, a game medal insertion lamp 129, a game start lamp 121, a stored number display A driving circuit 328 for driving the device 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127) is provided.

An information output circuit 334 (external collective terminal board 248) is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 334. The game information (for example, game state) of the slot machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 652 provided.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power management unit (not shown) to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 330 monitors the voltage of the power supply. If the value is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), it outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped.

The main control section 300 also has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400 and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400 . Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. However, the first sub-controller 400 is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main controller 300 .

<Sub-controller>
Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-controller 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives control commands transmitted by the main controller 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-controller 400 based on the control commands. This basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. Installed. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores control programs and data for controlling the first sub-controller 400 as a whole, lighting patterns of the backlight, data for controlling various displays, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and speakers 272 and 277 are provided in the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 according to commands from the CPU 404 . An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing sound data is connected to the sound source IC 418 , and the sound data obtained from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277 .

A drive circuit 422 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, etc.) are connected to the drive circuit 422 via an input/output interface. It is

Further, the first sub control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is provided with the shutter 163 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 according to a command from the CPU 404 .

In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sensor circuit 426. The sensor circuit 426 includes a shutter sensor 428 capable of detecting the position of the shutter 163 via an input interface, and a pressing operation of the production button 156. is connected to the effect button sensor 430 capable of detecting the . The CPU 404 monitors the states of the shutter sensor 428 and effect button sensor 430 for each interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-controller 500 via the output interface. The second sub-controller 500 performs various controls of the rendering device 160 including display control of the liquid crystal display device 157 . The second sub control unit 500 includes, for example, a control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 157, a control unit that controls various performance drive devices (for example, a control unit that controls motor drive of the shutter 163). It may be configured with a plurality of control units such as .

The second sub-controller 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives control commands transmitted by the first sub-controller 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-controller 500 based on the control commands. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. 512 and are installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control section 500, data for image display, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A VDP 516 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504 , generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518 , and displays the image on the effect image display device 157 .

<Pattern arrangement>
The pattern arrangement applied to each of the reels 110 to 112 will be described with reference to FIG. 4(a). In addition, this figure is a plan view showing the arrangement of the symbols applied to each reel (the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112).

On each of the reels 110 to 112, a predetermined number of symbols (21 frames numbered 0 to 20 in this embodiment) of a plurality of types (eight types in this embodiment) shown on the right side of the figure are arranged. Numbers 0 to 20 shown at the left end of the figure indicate the arrangement positions of symbols on the respective reels 110 to 112 . For example, in the present embodiment, the number 1 piece on the left reel 110 has a "replay" symbol, the number 0 piece on the middle reel 111 has a "bell" symbol, and the number 2 piece on the right reel 112 has a "replay" symbol. "Watermelon" pattern is placed on each.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 4(b). The figure shows the types of winning combinations (including working combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the activation or payout of each winning combination.

Of the winning combinations in this embodiment, the big bonuses (BB1, BB2) and the regular bonus (RB) are used as a combination to transition to a bonus game, and the replay is a replay without inserting new medals. The winning combination may be called a "working combination" to be distinguished from the winning combination. included. In addition, "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where the symbol combination of the working combination that does not accompany the payout of medals (does not accompany the payout of medals) is displayed on the activated line. Bonuses and prizes for replays are included.

Winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include big bonuses (BB1, BB2), regular bonuses (RB), small combinations (cherry, watermelon, bell), and replay combinations. It goes without saying that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

"Big bonus (BB1, BB2)" (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "BB") is a special role (operating role) in which a big bonus game (BB game), which is a special game, is started by winning a prize. . The corresponding symbol combinations are "white 7-white 7-white 7" for BB1 and "blue 7-blue 7-blue 7" for BB2. Further, the flag carryover is performed for BB1 and BB2. That is, when BB1 or BB2 is internally won, a flag indicating this is set (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). The state in which the flag indicating internal winning is set is maintained until the next game and thereafter, BB1 and BB2 are internally winning, and the symbol combination "white 7-white 7-white 7" corresponding to BB1 and the symbol corresponding to BB2. The combination "blue 7-blue 7-blue 7" is in a winning state.

"Regular bonus (RB)" is a special role (operating role) in which a regular bonus game (RB game) is started by winning a prize. The corresponding symbol combination is "Bonus-Bonus-Bonus". It should be noted that flag carrying over is performed for RB in the same manner as for BB described above. However, in the big bonus game (BB game) (details will be described later), the internal winning of the regular bonus game (RB game) and the display of the symbol combination on the winning line are not the starting conditions. Second, the regular bonus game is automatically started after the start of the big bonus game, and when one regular bonus game is finished, the next regular bonus game is immediately started. may be

"Small wins (cherry, watermelon, bell)" (hereinafter simply referred to as "cherry", "watermelon", and "bell") are winning wins in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning. The pattern combinations are "cherry-ANY-ANY" for cherry, "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" for watermelon, and "bell-bell-bell" for bell. Also, the corresponding number of payouts is as shown in the figure. In the case of "cherry-ANY-ANY", the symbol on the left reel 110 should be "cherry", and the symbols on the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112 may be any symbols.

A "replay" is a prize-winning combination (operating combination) that can be played without inserting medals (game media) in the next game due to winning, and medals are not paid out. The corresponding symbol combination is "replay-replay-replay".

<Types of RT game states>
Next, the types and transitions of RT-based game states in the slot machine 100 will be described.

<Replay low probability state (RT1)>
The low replay probability state (RT1) is a default RT-based game state (hereinafter also referred to as “normal game state”) that is initially set immediately after the power of the slot machine 100 is turned on. This game state is relatively disadvantageous compared to other game states.

In this example, in this replay low probability state (RT1), when a replay combination 2 (promotion replay 1) or replay combination 3 (promotion replay 2) is won, a replay high probability state (RT2) described later transition to Also, in this replay low probability state (RT1), when a special combination is internally won, the state shifts to a special combination internal winning state (RT3), which will be described later.

<Replay High Probability State (RT2)>
The high replay probability state is a gaming state in which the internal winning probability of replay is higher than that of the low replay probability state (RT1).

In this example, in this replay high probability state (RT2), when a special combination is internally won, the state shifts to a special combination internal winning state (RT3), which will be described later.

<Special role internal elected state (RT3)>
The special combination internal winning state (RT3) is a state in which the internal winning flag corresponding to the special combination is set to ON, and when the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing, the special combination corresponding to this flag is won. This is a game state in which the corresponding symbol combination can be displayed.

In this example, when a special role is won in this special role internal winning state (RT3), the state shifts to a special game state (RT4) which will be described later.

<Special game state (RT4)>
The special game state (RT4) is the most advantageous game state for the player among all the game states. In this example, in the special game state (RT4), when the specified number (for example, 200) is paid out, the replay low probability state (RT1) is entered.

In this example, the conditions for ending the special game state (RT4) are not particularly limited. It may be the case that the game has been played a number of times (for example, 6 times).

<Main control unit main processing>
First, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that has received this activation signal is reset-started by the reset interrupt and executes the main processing of the main control unit according to the control program stored in advance in the ROM 306 .

When the power is turned on, first, various initial setting processes are performed in step S101. Although the details will be described later, in this initial setting process, processes related to initial setting, setting change, recovery process, and the like are performed.

In step S102, medal insertion/start operation acceptance processing is executed. Here, the presence or absence of insertion of medals is checked, and preparations are made to transmit an insertion command indicating that medals have been inserted to the first sub-controller 400 . In addition, if the player wins the replay role in the previous game, the process of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, and the replay state is entered. No input required. Further, it is checked whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated, and if the start lever 135 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S103.

In step S103, winning line determination processing is performed to determine the number of inserted medals and to determine an effective winning line.

In step S104, a random number acquisition process for acquiring a random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316 is performed, and in the next step S105, an internal winning combination lottery process is performed. In this winning combination internal lottery process, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read out according to the current game state, and an internal lottery is performed using this and the acquired random number, and the result of this internal lottery is displayed. Preparations are made to transmit the internal lottery command shown to the first sub-control unit 400 . As a result of the internal lottery, if any winning combination (including the working combination) is internally won, the flag for that winning combination is turned on.

In step S106, reel stop data selection processing for selecting reel stop data is performed based on the internal lottery result of the winning combination internal lottery processing. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control section 300. FIG. Also, in step S106, preparations are made to transmit a reel stop data command including information about the selected reel stop data to the first sub-controller 400. FIG. In step S107, reel rotation start processing is executed to start rotation of all the reels 110-112.

In step S108, reel stop control processing is performed. In the reel stop control process, it is possible to accept the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when one of the stop buttons is pressed, a stop table of reel stop data is created in order to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. One of the reels 110 to 112 is stopped according to the number of frames to be drawn set in the stop table. When all the reels 110-112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S109.

In this step S108, for each stop operation, a stop button reception command related to the stop button 137 to 139 that has been stopped (more specifically, for the first stop operation, the stop button reception 1 command, the second stop operation, and the for the stop button reception 2 command, and for the third stop operation, prepare to transmit the stop button reception 3 command) to the first sub-control unit 400, and for the stop of each reel, the reel (Specifically, reel stop 1 command for the first stop reel, reel stop 2 command for the second stop operation, reel stop command for the third stop operation 3 command) to the first sub-controller 400.

In step S109, winning determination processing for determining winning is performed. In this winning determination process, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. For example, if "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the activated pay line, it is determined that a small winning combination (Bell) has been won. Also, in this step S109, preparations are made to transmit a prize determination command indicating the result of the prize determination to the first sub-control section 400. FIG.

In step S110, medal payout processing is performed. In the medal payout process, if the player wins some winning combination with payout, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out according to the number of winning lines.

In step S111, game state control processing is performed. In this game state control processing, processing relating to the transition of each game state of the RT system is performed, and the game state is shifted when the start condition or end condition is met. In addition, preparations are made for transmitting a game state command including information indicating the current RT-system game state.

One game is completed by the above. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described processing. Various commands prepared in the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission process (step S206) of the main controller timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

<Initial setting processing>
Next, the initial setting process (step S101) in the main control unit main process described with reference to FIG. 5 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the initial setting process.

In step S201, initialization is performed at startup. In this boot-time initialization, the stack initial value setting (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt prohibition setting, the initial setting of the I/O 310, the initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, the WDT 314 Permission to operate and setting of initial values.

In step S202, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the RAM 308. If there is an abnormality, the process proceeds to step S207 to execute initialization processing, and if there is no abnormality, the process proceeds to step S203.

In step S203, it is determined whether or not the front door 102 is open (opening). If the door is open, the process proceeds to step S204.If the door is not open, the process proceeds to step S205 for return processing. to run. In step S204, it is determined whether the setting key SW is ON or OFF. If it is ON, the process advances to step S206 to execute the setting change process. If it is OFF, the process advances to step S205 to execute the return process. .

In the recovery process of step S205, the process of returning the slot machine 100 to the state before the power failure (for example, the recovery data saved in the RAM 308 in the power failure process of step S411 of the main controller timer interrupt process, etc.) is executed. After that, the initialization process ends.

In step S206, after performing the setting change process, the process proceeds to step S207. Although the details will be described later, in this setting change processing, processing related to setting change and the like are performed.

In step S207, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, the initialization process is finished after executing the process of initializing the data in the RAM 308 (RAM clear) and the like.

<Setting change processing>
Next, the setting change process (step S206) in the initial setting process described with reference to FIG. 6 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the setting change process.

In step S301, a process of initializing the data in the RAM 308 (RAM clear) is performed, and in the next step S302, preparations are made to transmit a setting change start command indicating to start setting change to the first sub-controller 400. I do. When receiving this setting change start command from the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400 executes processing for starting display of the management screen.

In step S303, the interrupt status is set during setting change. As a result, in the various game processes in step S404 of the main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, the process corresponding to the setting change is executed.

In step S304, the current setting value is displayed using the setting value display device 101a. For example, if the current setting value is setting 6, the number 6 indicating setting 6 is displayed. In step S305, it is determined whether or not the reset switch has been operated. If the reset switch has been operated, the current setting value is changed. , the process of step S305 is repeatedly executed.

More specifically, in the processing of steps S305 to S307, each time the operation of the reset switch is detected once, the currently set set values 1 to 6 are updated by adding 1, and the set value is changed to 6. The set value is changed by repeatedly executing the process of returning to 1 when exceeding. If it is determined in step S307 that the start lever 135 has been operated, the operation of changing the set value by the reset SW is ended, and the process proceeds to step S308.

In step S308, the setting value displayed on the setting value display device 101a is stored in the RAM 308 as a new setting value (the setting value is confirmed), and in the next step S309, the display of the setting value display device 101a is erased. and hide the setting value.

In this example, the set value is determined when the operation of the start lever 135 is received. The configuration may be such that the set value is determined only in the case of the state. In this case, when the front door 102 is in the closed state, the setting value cannot be confirmed, but the display of the management screen may be continued.

In step S310, it is determined whether the setting key SW is OFF or ON. If it is ON, the process of step S310 is repeated. In step S311, preparations are made to transmit a setting change end command indicating to end the setting change to the first sub-controller 400. FIG. When the first sub control unit 400 receives this setting change end command from the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400 executes processing for ending the display of the management screen.

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (about once every 2 ms in this embodiment). Processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S401, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed. In step S402, the WDT 314 is periodically turned on so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, a restart is performed once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main controller timer interrupt.

In step S403, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I/O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area. In step S404, various game processes are executed, and processes corresponding to the interrupt status are executed. In step S405, timer update processing is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated according to their respective time units.

In step S<b>406 , command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 . In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the effect control contents.

In step S407, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334 .

In step S408, device monitoring processing is performed. Although the details will be described later, in this device monitoring process, set value confirmation processing, door opening monitoring processing, settlement processing, and the like are performed.

In step S409, it monitors whether the low voltage signal is on. If the low voltage signal is on (power shutdown is detected), the process proceeds to step S411, and if the low voltage signal is off (power shutdown is not detected), the process proceeds to step S410.

In step S410, various processes for ending the timer interrupt ending process are performed. In this timer interrupt termination process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S401 is set in each original register, and the process returns to the main control unit main process. On the other hand, in step S411, when power is restored, a specific variable and stack pointer for restoring the state at the time of power failure are saved as return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed. and return to the main control unit main processing.

<Device monitoring process>
Next, the device monitoring process (step S408) in the main controller timer interrupt process described with reference to FIG. 8 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the device monitoring process.

In step S501, after the set value confirmation process is performed, the process proceeds to step S502. Although the details will be described later, in this setting value confirmation processing, processing related to setting confirmation is performed. In step S502, door opening monitoring processing is performed.

In the door opening monitoring process, the main control unit 300 monitors the state of the open/close sensor, and when detecting a signal indicating the closed detection state, close detection information indicating that the front door 102 has been detected is stored in the RAM 308. In addition to storing the information, preparations are made to transmit a door closure detection command indicating that the closure of the front door 102 has been detected to the first sub-controller 400 . When the door closing detection command is received from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 generates closing detection information indicating that the closing of the front door 102 has been detected (in this example, information indicating "closed"). , closing date and time) are stored in the RAM 408 in chronological order as history information.

On the other hand, in the door opening monitoring process, the main control unit 300 monitors the state of the open/close sensor, and upon detecting a signal indicating an open detection state, outputs open detection information indicating that the opening of the front door 102 has been detected. While storing it in the RAM 308 , preparations are made for transmitting a door open detection command indicating that the opening of the front door 102 has been detected to the first sub-controller 400 . When the first sub control unit 400 receives this door open detection command from the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400 generates open detection information indicating that the opening of the front door 102 has been detected (in this example, information indicating "open"). , date and time of opening) are stored in the RAM 408 in chronological order as history information, and door opening notification is performed.

The door open notification will be described later, but in this example, when the front door 102 is in the door body open state, the light emitter (various lamps 420, etc.) emits light in an open light emission mode, and the sound output means (speaker 272, 277) outputs an opening sound (for example, a voice saying "the door is being opened"). Note that the mode of the door open notification is not particularly limited, and for example, a character string "Door is being opened" may be displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 .

In step S503, after performing the settlement process, the process proceeds to step S504. In this settlement process, the main control unit 300 monitors the state of the settlement button 134 sensor during the effective period of the settlement button 134 (for example, the period from when the game can be started until the operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). When a signal indicating that the settlement button 134 has been operated is detected, processing for settlement of electronically accumulated medals is performed, and a settlement command indicating that processing for settlement of medals has been executed is issued by the first subcontroller. Prepare for transmission to unit 400 .

In step S504, after performing other device monitoring processes, the device monitoring process ends. Although the details will be described later, in the other device monitoring process, an error notification start process, an error notification end process, and the like are performed.

<Setting value confirmation processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 10, setting value confirmation processing (step S501) in the device monitoring processing described with reference to FIG. 9 will be described. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the set value confirmation process.

In step S601, it is determined whether or not the set value is being checked. If the set value is being checked, the process proceeds to step S606, and if the set value is not being checked, the process proceeds to step S602. In step S602, it is determined whether or not it is the setting value confirmation valid period, and if it is the setting value confirmation valid period, the process proceeds to step S603, and if it is not the setting value confirmation valid period, the setting value confirmation processing is terminated.

Here, the set value confirmation valid period is not the MAX bet state (the state in which the number of medals that can be started in one game (three in this example) is betted, or the replay state due to replay), but the opening and closing This is the period during which the sensor is not in a closed detection state, any of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating, and an error is not being reported.

It should be noted that the conditions regarding the setting value confirmation effective period may be any one of the above conditions or any plurality of the above conditions, instead of all of the above conditions.

At step S603, it is determined whether the setting key SW is ON or OFF. In step S604, the current setting value is displayed using the setting value display device 101a. For example, if the current setting value is setting 6, the numeral 6 indicating setting 6 is displayed. In the next step S605, preparations are made to transmit a setting confirmation start command indicating to start setting confirmation to the first sub-controller 400. FIG. When receiving this setting confirmation start command from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 executes processing for starting display of the management screen.

In step S606 during setting confirmation, it is determined whether the setting key SW is OFF or ON. If it is ON, the setting value confirmation process is terminated so as to continue setting confirmation. If it is OFF, the process proceeds to step S607. move on. In step S607, the display of the setting value display device 101a is erased to hide the setting value, and in the next step S608, a setting confirmation end command indicating to end the setting confirmation is transmitted to the first sub-controller 400. make preparations for When the first sub control unit 400 receives this setting confirmation end command from the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400 executes processing for ending the display of the management screen.

<Other device monitoring processing>
Next, another device monitoring process (step S504) in the device monitoring process described with reference to FIG. 9 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of other device monitoring processing.

In step S701, it is determined whether or not each error detection state exists. If not each error detection state, the other device monitoring process is terminated.

Here, errors that can occur in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment include door open error (door open error), hopper empty error, medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error), medal insertion errors 2 to 4, medal Payout abnormalities 1 to 3, overflow abnormalities, RAM defects, prize winning abnormalities, and the like.

A door open error (door open error) is an error that notifies the opening of the door of the gaming machine, occurs when the front door 102 is opened (becomes an error detection state), and is resolved when the front door 102 is closed. (It becomes an error non-detection state).

As described above, the main control unit 300 monitors the state of the open/close sensor in the door opening monitoring process, and upon detecting a signal indicating the closed detection state, transmits a door closing detection command to the first sub-control unit 400. Then, the first sub-control unit 400 stores the closed detection information (in this example, information indicating “closed” and the date and time of closing) in the RAM 408 in chronological order as history information. When the signal indicating is detected, the door open detection command is sent to the first sub-controller 400, and the first sub-controller 400 receives the open detection information (in this example, information indicating "open" and the date and time of opening) are stored in the RAM 408 in chronological order as history information, and door opening notification is performed.

A hopper empty error is a payout error relating to the payout of medals, and occurs when the number of medals stored in the hopper accommodated inside the main body 101 falls below a prescribed number (becomes an error detection state), and the prescribed number of medals is reached. Replenishing the hopper with the above medals will solve the problem (the error will not be detected).

Medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error) occurs when the inserted medals remain in the medal selector or the like (becomes an error detection state). ) is accepted (error non-detection state). Medal insertion error 2 occurs when the number of inserted medals exceeds a specified number (error detection state), and is resolved by changing the set value or clearing the RAM (error non-detection state).

Medal insertion error 3 occurs when either insertion sensor 1 or insertion sensor 2 is turned on (becomes an error detection state) other than during medal insertion processing, and medal insertion abnormality 4 occurs when the inserted medal is inserted. This occurs when the sensor 1 and the input sensor 2 are not passed normally (becomes an error detection state). After removing the cause of the error, it is resolved when the operation of the error release switch (reset SW in this example) is accepted. (It becomes an error non-detection state).

Medal payout error 1 occurs when there is no payout of medals for a certain period of time when the medal payout device is driven (an error is detected), and medal payout error 2 occurs when medals remain while the medal payout device is driven. (error detection state), and medal payout error 3 occurs when either payout sensor 1 or payout sensor 2 is turned on (becomes an error detection state) other than during medal payout processing. After removing the cause, the error is resolved (the error is not detected) when the operation of the error release switch (the reset SW in this example) is accepted.

An overflow error occurs when the overflow terminal of the medal auxiliary storage box turns on (becomes an error detection state), and after removing the cause of the error, the operation of the error release switch (reset SW in this example) is accepted. (Error non-detected state). A RAM defect occurs when an abnormality is detected by checking the RAM (an error detection state), and is resolved when an operation of an error release switch (reset SW in this example) is accepted (an error non-detection state). Become). A winning error occurs when a winning pattern different from the winning determined by internal lottery is won after the reels 110 to 112 are stopped (error detection state), and the operation of the error release switch (reset SW in this example) is performed. It is canceled when it is accepted (it becomes an error non-detection state).

Note that the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to slot machines, and can also be applied to pachinko machines. Errors that can occur in a pachinko machine include, for example, lower tray full error, payout device error, overpayment error, illegal payout error, main control unit communication error, magnetic abnormality error, magnetic field abnormality error, frame open error, RAM clear error , impact sensor errors, etc. These errors are also resolved when the operation of the error release switch is received after removing the cause of the error.

In step S702, it is determined whether or not it is an error reportable period, and if it is not an error reportable period, the process proceeds to other device monitoring processing, and if it is an error reportable period, the process proceeds to step S703.

Here, the error reportable period is a period during which the setting is not being changed and any of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating.

In step S703, it is determined whether or not each error is being reported. If not, the process proceeds to step S704, and if each error is being reported, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S704, error notification start processing is executed.

In this error notification start process, the main control section 300 displays an error code on the payout number indicator 127 and prepares for transmitting an error command corresponding to the detected error to the first sub-control section 400 . When the first sub-controller 400 receives this error command from the main controller 300, it executes processing to start error notification.

The error notification will be described later, but in this example, when a selector error occurs, a character string "selector error has occurred!" Please call the store clerk." is displayed, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an error light emission mode, and an error sound ("An error has occurred. Please call the game clerk") is output. The mode of error notification is not particularly limited, and for example, error notification may be performed by movement of the movable means (reels 110 to 112).

In step S705, it is determined whether or not the front door 102 is open (opening). If the door is open, the other device monitoring process is terminated. proceed to In step S706, it is determined whether or not the error notification termination condition is satisfied. If the error notification termination condition is not satisfied, the other device monitoring process is terminated. , the process proceeds to step S707.

Here, the error notification termination condition is a condition that is met when an error cancellation operation (in this example, an operation to turn on the reset SW) is received in an error non-detection state.

In step S707, error notification end processing is executed. In this error notification termination process, the main control section 300 erases the error code displayed on the payout number display 127 and transmits an error resolution command corresponding to the resolved error to the first sub-control section 400. prepare for When receiving this error resolution command from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 executes a process of ending the error notification that is being executed.

In step S708, it is determined whether the setting key SW is ON or OFF. If it is OFF, other device monitoring processing is terminated so as to continue displaying the management screen. If it is ON, the process proceeds to step S709. move on. In step S709, the main control unit 300 sends to the first sub-control unit 400 a preparatory screen display command for instructing start of display of the preparatory screen (see, for example, FIG. 17(A)(4)). prepare. When the first sub-controller 400 receives this preparation screen display command from the main controller 300, the first sub-controller 400 displays the preparation screen until it becomes possible to display the management screen, or it is possible to display the management screen. Even if it is, for a predetermined period of time, the process of displaying the screen during preparation, etc. is executed.

<Management screen>
Next, the management screen will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 19. FIG.

Here, the management screen is a screen used by an administrator such as a store clerk of a game parlor to make various settings related to the slot machine 100. For example, a display on which an image related to settings related to a game machine is displayed. (menu display, etc.), and a display in which an image for the administrator is displayed (for example, setting confirmation, setting change, etc.). The display contents of the administrator screen are not particularly limited, but in this example, the administrator screen SD shown in FIGS. 12A and 12B can be displayed.

The administrator screen SD of this example is composed of a title display of "system settings" indicating that it is a screen for administrator and a plurality of types of menu displays. The menu display in this example includes power saving setting, time setting, error history setting, and setting history. , right key, left key) or the OK button 193b, any item on the menu display can be arbitrarily selected.

For example, when the power saving setting item is selected on the administrator screen SD, power saving mode setting (for example, setting the volume of the speakers 272 and 277, simple setting of the brightness of LEDs and various lamps, etc.) is possible. , and when the time setting item is selected, the date and time can be set.

When an error history item is selected on the administrator screen SD, the history of errors that have occurred in the game machine in the past, the history of opening and closing the front door 102, the history of power on/recovery, etc. can be displayed, and when the setting history item is selected, it is possible to display the history of past setting changes and setting confirmations. The opening/closing history of the front door 102 and the setting history in the error history will be described later.

Items that can be selected on the administrator screen SD are not limited to this example. It may be possible to set an error sound or the like to be output, or it may be possible to set the light intensity of an LED or various lamps.

Next, before describing the management screen SD, terms used in subsequent drawings will be described with reference to FIG. 12(A).

"Power state" indicates the state of power supplied to the slot machine 100 from the outside, "Power OFF" indicates the state in which power is not supplied to the slot machine 100, and "Power ON" indicates the state of the slot machine. 100 is supplied with power.

"Reel operating state" indicates the operating state of the reels 110 to 112, "stopped" is the state in which all of the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, and "operating" indicates at least the reels 110 to 112. One is a rotating state, which is synonymous with "rotating".

The “door closed state/door open state” indicates the state of the front door 102, the “door closed state” is the state in which the front door 102 is closed, and the “door open state” is the front door. The door 102 is open. "Closed detection state/open detection state" indicates the state of the open/close sensor. A state in which the detection state of the open/close sensor is forcibly set to the closed detection state by a predetermined operation, and the "open detection state" is a state in which it is detected that the front door 102 is in the open state. is.

"Non-inserted state/inserted state" indicates whether or not medals are inserted. "Non-inserted state" is the state in which medals are not inserted, and "inserted state" is the state in which medals are inserted. state, or replay state due to replay winning. "Error detected state" indicates whether an error is detected, "error non-detected state" indicates a state in which no error is detected, and "error detected state" indicates an error detected. is in a state of

"Setting key SW" indicates the state of the setting key SW, "ON" indicates that the setting key SW is ON, and "OFF" indicates that the setting key SW is OFF. "Reset SW" indicates the state of the reset SW, "ON" indicates that the reset SW is ON, and "OFF" indicates that the reset SW is OFF.

"Start lever" indicates the state of the start lever 135, "ON" indicates that the start lever 135 is ON, and "OFF" indicates that the start lever 135 is OFF. "Stop button" indicates the state of the stop buttons 137 to 139, "non-operation" indicates the state in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are not operated, and "stop operation" indicates the state in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated. state. “Cross button” indicates the state of the cross button 193, “non-operation” is the state in which the cross button 193 is not operated, and “specific operation” is the state in which the cross button 193 is operated.

"Luminous body" indicates the operating state of the light emitting means (in this example, various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, etc.)), and "light off" indicates that the light emitting means is turned off. The "open luminous mode" is a state in which the luminous means emits light in an open luminous mode indicating that the front door 102 is in the open state. 112 is a state in which the light emitting means is emitting light in a light emission mode during stop indicating that the machine is in stop.

"Output sound" indicates the operating state of the sound output means (speakers 272 and 277 in this example), "non-output" indicates a state in which sound is not output from the sound output means, and "setting change sound" is a state in which the sound output means is outputting a setting change sound indicating that the setting is being changed, and "open sound" is a state in which the sound output means indicates that the front door 102 is open. A state in which a sound is being output, and "stopping BGM" is a state in which stopping BGM indicating that the reels 110 to 112 are being stopped is output from the sound output means. "Display example" indicates an example of display contents displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. FIG.

<Setting change mode>
Next, the setting change mode will be described with reference to FIG. 12(A). FIG. 12A is a diagram showing the flow of the setting change mode in chronological order.

<Turn on the setting key SW in the setting change mode/power OFF>
In the state shown in FIG. 12(A)(1), the setting key SW is turned ON by the manager of the amusement arcade when the power supply is OFF, the front door 102 is in the open state, and the open/close sensor is in the open detection state. This is a state in which an operation (a certain operation) has been performed to turn on the setting key SW.

In this state, since the power supply state is OFF, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) are turned off, the output sound of the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) is not output, and the display means (liquid crystal display device) 157) is hidden.

<Setting change mode/starting setting change mode, displaying management screen>
The states shown in FIGS. 12A and 12B are those in which the power switch is operated by the manager of the amusement arcade in the state where the setting key SW is ON, as described with reference to FIG. 12A and 1). This is a state in which the power state has changed from power OFF to power ON.

The slot machine 100 is configured to shift to a state in which setting values can be changed (setting change mode) when the power is turned on in a state in which the setting key SW is turned ON from OFF. Then, in the same state, the state shifts to a state in which the setting value can be changed (setting change mode), and a setting change sound is output from the sound output means (speakers 272 and 277).

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 12(A)(2), since the front door 102 is open, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an open light emission mode.

Further, in the slot machine 100, when the front door 102 (door body) is in the open state and the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is the open detection state, an operation (certain operation) to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON. is performed, display of a management screen (management display) can be started.

More specifically, in steps S203 and S204 of the initial setting process described with reference to FIG. 7 is started. In this example, the setting change process is started because the front door 102 is open and the setting key SW is ON.

Subsequently, in step S302 of the setting change process, the main control unit 300 transmits a setting change start command indicating to start changing the setting to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 When a setting change start command is received from the main control unit 300, a process for starting display of the management screen is executed. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 12(A)(2), the management screen SD is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157).

Subsequently, in step S304 of the setting change process, the main control unit 300 displays the current setting value using the setting value display device 101a. As shown in FIG. 12(A)(2), the number 6 indicating the setting 6 is displayed on the setting value display device 101a.

<Setting change mode/change of set value>
The state shown in FIG. 12(A)(3) is a state in which the reset SW has been operated once by the manager of the game parlor in the setting change mode.

In steps S305 to S307 of the setting change process, the main control unit 300 updates the currently set setting values 1 to 6 by adding 1 each time the operation of the reset switch is detected. The set value is changed by repeatedly executing the process of returning to 1 when the value exceeds 6. In this example, one operation of the reset switch was detected. , the setting value display device 101a displays the number 1 indicating setting 1. FIG.

<Setting change mode/Set value confirmation>
The state shown in FIG. 12(A)(4) is a state in which the start lever 135 is operated by the manager of the amusement arcade in the setting change mode.

When determining that the start lever 135 has been operated in step S307 of the setting change process, the main control unit 300 changes the setting value displayed on the setting value display device 101a to a new one in subsequent steps S308 and S309. The set value is stored (confirmed) as a set value, and the display of the set value display device 101a is erased to hide the set value. As shown in (4), the display of the set value display device 101a is erased.

<End of setting change mode/setting change mode>
The state shown in FIG. 12(A)(5) is a state in which the setting key SW is turned OFF by an operation to turn the setting key SW from ON to OFF by the manager of the game parlor in the setting change mode.

When determining that the setting key SW is OFF in step S310 of the setting change process, the main control unit 300 transmits a setting change end command indicating to end the setting change to the first sub-control unit 400. When the first sub-controller 400 receives this setting change end command from the main controller 300, it executes a process of ending the display of the management screen.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 12(A)(5), the management screen SD displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is erased, and the normal effect is started. In this example, since the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, an effect to be executed while the reels 110 to 112 are stopped is started as a normal effect.

<Setting confirmation mode>
Next, the setting confirmation mode will be described with reference to FIG. 12(B). FIG. 12B is a diagram showing the flow of the setting confirmation mode in chronological order.

<Setting confirmation mode/Front door: Door closed state>
The state shown in FIG. 12(B)(1) is a state in which the power supply state is ON, the front door 102 is in the closed state, and the open/close sensor is in the state of detection of closing, and the stop effect is being executed.

In the same state, since the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in a stop light emission mode, and the stop BGM is output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277), In the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157), an effect during stop is displayed.

<Setting confirmation mode/front door: door closed state → door open state)>
The state shown in FIG. 12(B)(2) is the front door 102 opened in the door body closed state described with reference to FIG. It is in an open state.

In the same state, since the front door 102 is in the door body open state, the light emitter (various lamps 420, etc.) emits light in an open light emission mode, and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) outputs an opening sound. Then, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, the effect during stop is continued.

<Setting confirmation mode/power ON, front door (door body open state), setting key SW ON>
In the state shown in FIG. 12(B)(3), the power supply state shown in FIG. An operator performs an operation (certain operation) to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON, and the setting key SW is turned ON.

The slot machine 100 is configured to shift to a state in which setting values can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode) when an operation is performed to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON while the power is on. Then, in the same state, the state shifts to a state (setting confirmation mode) in which setting values can be confirmed.

Further, the slot machine 100 turns the setting key SW from OFF to ON when the front door 102 (door body) is in the open state and the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is the open detection state (first state). When an operation (a certain operation) is performed, it is configured to be able to start displaying a management screen SD (management display).

More specifically, in steps S602 and S603 of the set value confirmation process described with reference to FIG. It is not a state in which the number of medals (three in this example) is betted, or a replay state by replay), the open/close sensor is not in a closed detection state, and one of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating. If it is determined that the error is not being reported) and the setting key SW is ON, the current setting value is displayed using the setting value display device 101a in subsequent step S604.

In this example, since it is the setting value confirmation effective period, the setting key SW is ON, and the current setting value is setting 6, the number 6 indicating setting 6 is displayed on the setting value display device 101a. do.

Subsequently, in step S605 of the setting value confirmation process, the main control unit 300 transmits a setting confirmation start command indicating to start setting confirmation to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 When the setting confirmation start command is received from the main control unit 300, the processing for starting the display of the management screen is executed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 12(B)(3), the management screen SD is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157).

<Setting confirmation mode / end of setting confirmation mode>
The state shown in FIG. 12(B)(4) is a state in which the setting key SW is turned OFF by an operation to turn the setting key SW from ON to OFF by the manager of the game parlor in the setting confirmation mode.

When determining that the setting key SW is OFF in step S606 of the setting value confirmation process, the main control unit 300 transmits a setting confirmation end command indicating to end the setting confirmation to the first sub-control unit 400. Then, when the first sub-controller 400 receives this setting confirmation end command from the main control unit 300, the first sub-controller 400 executes the process of ending the display of the management screen.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 12(B)(4), the management screen SD displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is erased, and the normal effect is started. In this example, since the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, an effect to be executed while the reels 110 to 112 are stopped is started as a normal effect.

<Display example 1 of management screen>
Next, display example 1 of the management screen will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13A is a diagram showing the flow of display example 1 of the management screen in chronological order.

The states shown in FIGS. 13(A)(1) to 13(A)(3) are the same states as the setting confirmation mode described using FIGS. 12(B)(1) to 12(B)(3). When the power supply state is ON, the front door 102 is in the open state, and the opening/closing sensor is in the open detection state, an operation (some operation) to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON is performed by the manager of the game parlor. , the management screen SD has started to be displayed.

13(A)(1) to 13(A)(2), the front door 102 is opened. Therefore, in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157), in addition to (or instead of) executing the stopped effect, an open notification (for example, An image including a character string "the door is open") may be displayed (the same applies to other embodiments).

<Management screen display example 1/open/close sensor: open detection state → closed detection state>
The state shown in FIG. 13(A)(4) is a state in which the detection state of the open/close sensor is forced to the closed detection state by a predetermined operation in the setting confirmation mode.

Even if the detection state of the opening/closing sensor (detection means) changes from the open detection state to the closed detection state while the management screen SD (management display) is displayed, the slot machine 100 can be used for management. It is configured to continue displaying the screen SD (display for management).

More specifically, in steps S601 and S606 of the setting value confirmation process described with reference to FIG. The process ends and the setting confirmation mode is continued. In this example, since the setting value is being confirmed and the setting key SW is ON, the management screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 13(A)(4). Continue to display SD.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 13(A)(4), the front door 102 is open, but since the detection state of the open/close sensor is the closed detection state, the luminous body (various lamp 420, etc.) is turned off, and the output sound of the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) that has been outputting the opening sound is set to non-output.

Here, the luminous bodies to be extinguished may be a state in which all of the various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, etc.) are extinguished, or any one or more of them may be in an extinguished state. The light may be turned off.

<Management screen display example 1/Exiting setting confirmation mode>
The state shown in FIG. 13(A)(5) is a state in which the setting key SW is turned OFF by an operation to turn the setting key SW from ON to OFF by the manager of the game parlor in the setting confirmation mode.

If the main control unit 300 determines that the setting key SW is OFF in step S606 of the setting value confirmation process described with reference to FIG. 1 sub-control unit 400, and when the first sub-control unit 400 receives this setting confirmation end command from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 executes processing to end the display of the management screen.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 13(A)(5), the management screen SD displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is erased, and the normal effect is started. In this example, since the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, an effect to be executed while the reels 110 to 112 are stopped is started as a normal effect.

<Management screen display example 1/Turn on the setting key SW with the open/close sensor (closed detection state)>
The state shown in FIG. 13(A)(6) is an operation (a certain operation) to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON by the manager of the amusement arcade when the front door 102 is in the open state and the open/close sensor is in the closed detection state. ) is performed and the setting key SW is turned ON.

In the slot machine 100, when the front door 102 (door body) is in the open state and the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is in the closed detection state, an operation (a certain operation) to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON is performed. It is configured such that the display of the management screen SD (management display) cannot be started even if it is changed.

More specifically, in steps S602 and S603 of the set value confirmation process described with reference to FIG. It is not a state in which the number of medals (three in this example) is betted, or a replay state by replay), the open/close sensor is not in a closed detection state, and one of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating. If it is determined that the error is not being reported) and the setting key SW is ON, the current setting value is displayed using the setting value display device 101a in subsequent step S604.

In this example, since the open/close sensor is in the closed detection state and the set value confirmation valid period is not reached, the set value confirmation process is terminated and the subsequent step S604 is not executed. is not displayed. In addition, since the process of step S605 is not executed, the setting confirmation start command indicating the start of setting confirmation is not transmitted to the first sub-controller 400, so the display as shown in FIG. 13(A)(6) In the display area of the means (liquid crystal display device 157), the display of the management screen SD is not started, and the effect during stop is continued.

<Confirmation action>
Next, confirmation operations that can be executed by the slot machine 100 will be described.

Here, the confirmation operation means that the confirmation operation means of the slot machine 100 (in this example, the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500) By operating the production means (one or more production means) based on a predetermined operation pattern, whether or not the production means is operating based on a certain operation pattern (abnormality It is the work of checking (inspecting) whether there is any.

<Confirmation Action/Direction Means (Display Means)>
The slot machine 100 is provided with display means capable of displaying as one of effect means. Display means provided in the slot machine 100 includes, for example, the liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157, the payout number display device 127, the accumulated number display device 125, the game information display device 126, and various other display devices described with reference to FIG. LED etc. are mentioned.

When the display means is employed as the presentation means, the operation pattern may be, for example, an operation pattern in which the entire display area of the display means is filled with one or more colors, or the display and non-display of the display means are performed at certain time intervals. , an operation pattern for lighting segments of the LED in a certain order, an operation pattern for blinking the LED, an operation pattern for changing the color of the display means, and an operation pattern for displaying in a certain order when there are a plurality of display means. , an operation pattern in which only some display means are displayed when there are a plurality of display means, and the like.

<Confirmation Action/Direction Means (Sound Output Means)>
The slot machine 100 includes sound output means capable of outputting sound as one of effect means. Sound output means included in the slot machine 100 includes, for example, the speakers 272 and 277 described with reference to FIG.

When the sound output means is employed as the presentation means, the certain operation patterns include, for example, an operation pattern for outputting a certain sound from the sound output means, an operation pattern for changing the volume and frequency of the sound output from the sound output means, Operation pattern for stopping (silencing) sound output from sound output means, operation pattern for outputting sound in a certain order when there are multiple sound output means, partial sound output when there are multiple sound output means An operation pattern or the like in which only the means outputs sound is included.

<Confirmation action/effect means (light emitting means)>
The slot machine 100 is provided with light emitting means capable of emitting (outputting) light as one of effect means. Light-emitting means provided in the slot machine 100 include, for example, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, the reel backlights of the reels 110 to 112, the production button 192, the stop buttons 137 to 139, and the start lever 135, which have been described with reference to FIG. etc., and in this example, all the light emitting means are composed of LEDs.

When a light emitting means is employed as the effect means, one operation pattern is, for example, an operation pattern in which one, a plurality, or all of the LEDs constituting one or more light emitting means are turned on in a certain order. Alternatively, an operation pattern that blinks one, a plurality, or all of the LEDs that constitute a plurality of light emitting means, an operation pattern that changes the color of one or more light emitting means, and light emission in a certain order when there are a plurality of light emitting means Examples include an operation pattern in which the means emits light, an operation pattern in which when there are a plurality of light emitting means, all of the light emitting means repeatedly turn off light emission in a single color, and an operation pattern in which when there are a plurality of light emitting means, only a part of the light emitting means emits light. .

<Confirmation Action/Direction Means (Moving Means)>
The slot machine 100 is provided with movable means as one of effect means. The movable means provided in the slot machine 100 includes, for example, the reels 110 to 112 and the shutter (shielding device) 163 described with reference to FIG.

When the movable means is adopted as the rendering means, for example, a certain operation pattern is to operate the movable means in a predetermined motion (for example, one, more than one, or all of vibration, rotation, expansion and contraction, and vertical movement). an operation pattern that causes the movable means to move in a random motion (e.g., one, a plurality, or all of vibration, rotation, expansion and contraction, and vertical movement); upper limit position, lower limit position, etc.).

<Confirmation action / start of confirmation action>
In this example, while the management display SD (for example, the management display SD shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, the cross key 193b and the OK button 193a are pressed. By operating, it is possible to arbitrarily select items such as "power saving setting", "time setting", "error/setting history", and "LED operation check". When selected, the confirmation operation of the light emitting means is started.

In addition, the condition for starting the operation confirmation of the production means is not limited to this example, and may be started in connection with, for example, power-on or reset operation, or may be started when an operation by a certain operation means is received. Alternatively, it may be started when a predetermined display (e.g., confirmation operation screen of the effect means) is displayed on the display means (e.g., the liquid crystal display device 157), or the predetermined display (e.g., effect It may be started when a predetermined time has elapsed after the confirmation operation screen of the means is displayed, or one, more than one, or all of the confirmation operations of the plurality of production means are automatically performed at predetermined time intervals. It may be started by switching, or may be started by randomly switching one, a plurality, or all of the confirming actions of the plurality of effect means.

In addition, the item of confirmation operation in the display for management is not limited to "LED operation check" corresponding to the confirmation operation of the light emitting means. One, more than one, or all of "speaker operation check" corresponding to the operation, "movable body operation check" corresponding to the confirming operation of the movable means, and the like may be provided.

Further, the confirmation operation of the production means may be executed only when the door body (front door 102) is in a closed state. Priority may be given to the door opening notification by the light emitting means. Further, the confirmation operation of the production means may be executable regardless of the state of the door body (front door 102). Also, priority may be given to the confirmation operation of the light emitting means. Further, the confirmation operation of the effect means may be performed only in part when the door body (front door 102) is in the open state. , the door opening notification may be performed by some of the light emitting means, and the confirmation operation may be performed by the other remaining light emitting means.

As described above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 or pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) includes display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) and A door that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1), a detection means that can detect the open/closed state of the door (for example, an open/close sensor shown in FIG. 1), and an operation (for example, , an operation from OFF to ON by rotating), and a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate (for example, a reels 110 to 112 shown), and a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and a game provided with a platform, wherein the detection means is means capable of changing the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state; , the detection state can be changed to the open detection state, and a predetermined operation regarding the detection means (for example, a light blocking piece of a certain length between the light projecting part and the light receiving part of the open/close sensor of the main body 101 is inserted and fixed with tape, etc.), the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state even if the door is in the open state, and the display The means is means capable of displaying a management display for an administrator, and the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state (hereinafter referred to as "first state"). ), when the certain operation is performed, the management display can be started to be displayed, and in the first state in which the reel is rotating, the certain operation is The management display is configured not to start displaying the management display even if the operation is performed. When the plurality of reels are stopped in a first stop mode (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to a small winning combination (bell)) by a stop button, the display of the management display is started, and When the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, even if the certain operation is performed, the display of the management display cannot be started. When the display for is displayed, the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state. A game machine characterized in that the display of the management display (for example, the management screen SD shown in FIGS. 13(A)(4)) is continued even when the state changes from the state to the closure detection state. is.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, if a certain operation is performed on the first operating means during a game (for example, while reels are spinning or medals are being bet), cheating is performed. Since there is a possibility that the management display is not displayed while the reel is rotating even if the door is in an open state, security can be improved. In addition, for example, even if an unauthorized person performs a predetermined operation to open the door while the detection state of the detection means remains in the closed detection state, the management display cannot be confirmed, thereby improving security. can be achieved. Further, after the display for management is displayed, the display for management is continued even if the door opening sensor is in the closing detection state, thereby providing a game machine that is easy to use for the game clerk. It becomes possible.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) includes display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) and light emitting means (for example, various lamps 420 ( an upper lamp, a lower lamp, a side lamp 144, a title panel 162 lamp, etc.)), a door body (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) that is provided on the front surface of the game table and can be opened and closed, and opening and closing of the door body Detecting means capable of detecting the state (for example, the open/close sensor shown in FIG. 1), and first operating means (for example, the setting key SW ), a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 1) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate, and provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels to rotate the reels. A game machine comprising a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) for individually stopping the game machine, wherein the detecting means detects a closed detection state when the door body is in a closed state. The detection means is means capable of changing the detection state to an open detection state when the door body is in an open state, and a predetermined operation (for example, , an operation of inserting a light shielding piece of a certain length between the light projecting part and the light receiving part of the open/close sensor of the main body 101 and fixing it with tape or the like) is performed, so that the door body is in the open state. The detection means is configured so that the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state even when the door body is in the open state. and when the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state (hereinafter referred to as "first state") and the certain operation is performed, the management display can be started to be displayed. , the management display is configured not to start displaying the management display even if the certain operation is performed in the first state in which the reels are rotating; , in a state in which the reels are rotating and in a state in which the certain operation is performed, the plurality of reels are stopped by the stop button in a first stop mode (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to a small combination (bell) ), the management display starts to be displayed, and when the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, the certain operation is performed, the display of the management display cannot be started Even if the detection state of the detection means changes from the open detection state to the closed detection state while the management display is displayed, the management display is displayed. (For example, the management screen SD shown in FIG. 13(A)(4)) is continued, and the light emission means is in a state in which a game can be played and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state (for example, in FIG. 13(A)(2)), light can be emitted in a first light emission mode (e.g., open light emission mode), and the light emission means is during the display of the management display and the detection means When the detection state is the open detection state (for example, the state shown in FIG. 13A (3)), light can be emitted in the first light emission mode, and the light emission means is in a state in which a game can be played and the When the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state (for example, the state shown in FIG. 13(A)(5)), light can be emitted in a second light emission mode (for example, light emission mode during stop, light emission mode during play). , wherein the light emitting means is extinguished when the management display is being displayed and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state (for example, the state shown in FIG. 13(A)(4)). It is a play table that

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, for example, even if the fraudulent person performs a predetermined operation to open the door body while the detection state of the detection means is in the closed detection state, the display for management cannot be confirmed. By doing so, security can be improved. Further, after the display for management is displayed, the display for management is continued even if the door opening sensor is in the closing detection state, thereby providing a game machine that is easy to use for the game clerk. It becomes possible.

Further, the light emitting means emits the first light when the game is available and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state, and when the management display is being displayed and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state. in a state in which a game can be played and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, light emission is possible in the second light emission mode, while the display for management is being displayed and the detection means When the detection state of is the closed detection state, the light emitting means is extinguished while the display of the management display is continued. It is possible to reliably grasp by the light emitting means that the detection state of the detection means has changed to the closed detection state while the display is being displayed, and it is possible to improve the convenience of the administrator, such as preventing forgetting to turn off the display for management. can.

Further, sound output means is provided, and the sound output means is capable of outputting an opening sound when the management display is being displayed and the detection state of the detection means is the opening detection state, and the light emission means is: The opening sound may be stopped when the management display is being displayed and the detection state of the detection means is the closing detection state.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) includes display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) and light emitting means (for example, various lamps 420 ( an upper lamp, a lower lamp, a side lamp 144, a title panel 162 lamp, etc.)), a door body (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) that is provided on the front surface of the game table and can be opened and closed, and opening and closing of the door body Detecting means capable of detecting the state (for example, the open/close sensor shown in FIG. 1), and first operating means (for example, the setting key SW ), a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 1) that are rotationally driven and provided with a plurality of types of symbols, a second operation means (for example, a cross button 193 shown in FIG. 1), Predetermined confirmation operation for the light emitting means (for example, an operation to light one, a plurality, or all of the LEDs constituting one or more light emitting means in a certain order, one or more light emitting means operation of blinking one, a plurality, or all of the LEDs that constitute Confirmation operation means (e.g., main control unit) for executing the operation of repeating light emission in a single color with all the light emitting means when there are a plurality of means, the operation of causing only a part of the light emitting means to emit light when there are a plurality of light emitting means, etc. 300, first sub-control unit 400), wherein the detection means is means capable of changing the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state, The detection means is a means capable of changing the detection state to an open detection state when the door body is in an open state. and the light-receiving part, a light-shielding piece of a certain length is inserted and fixed with tape or the like) is performed, so that the detection state of the detection means is the above-mentioned even if the door is in the open state. The display means is means capable of displaying a management display for an administrator, and the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the above-mentioned When the certain operation is performed in the open detection state, the display of the management display can be started, and the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state. , even if the certain operation is performed, the management Even if the detection state of the detection means changes from the open detection state to the closed detection state while the management display is being displayed, , the display of the management display (for example, the management screen SD shown in FIG. 13(A)(4)) is continued, and the light emission means is in a state in which a game can be played and the detection state of the detection means is the above In the open detection state, light can be emitted in a first light emission mode (for example, open light emission mode), and the light emitting means is capable of emitting light when the management display is being displayed and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state. , the light emitting means can emit light in the first light emitting mode, and the light emitting means emits light in the second light emitting mode (e.g., light emission during stop) when the game is possible and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state. The light emission means is extinguished when the management display is being displayed and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, and the confirmation operation means is When the management display is being displayed and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, the second operation means is operated (for example, by the cross key 193a, "LED operation check" in the management display menu display ]) is performed, it is possible to cause the light emitting means to perform the confirming operation.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, for example, even if the fraudulent person performs a predetermined operation to open the door body while the detection state of the detection means is in the closed detection state, the display for management cannot be confirmed. By doing so, security can be improved. Further, after the display for management is displayed, the display for management is continued even if the door opening sensor is in the closing detection state, thereby providing a game machine that is easy to use for the game clerk. It becomes possible.

Further, the light emitting means emits the first light when the game is available and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state, and when the management display is being displayed and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state. in a state in which a game can be played and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, light emission is possible in the second light emission mode, while the display for management is being displayed and the detection means When the detection state of is the closed detection state, the light emitting means is extinguished while the display of the management display is continued. It is possible to reliably grasp by the light emitting means that the detection state of the detection means has changed to the closed detection state while the display is being displayed, and it is possible to improve the convenience of the administrator, such as preventing forgetting to turn off the display for management. can.

In addition, since the light-emitting means is turned off during the display for management and when the door is closed, if the light-emitting means is out of order, it is difficult to notice. By performing the checking operation of the means, the failure of the light emitting means can be easily noticed.

The second operation means is composed of a plurality of operation means (for example, cross key 193a (up button, down button, right button, left button), OK button 193b). The operation for is an operation using at least a part of the operation means among the plurality of operation means (for example, an operation to select the item "LED operation check" in the management display menu display with the cross key 193a) may be

In addition, in the first state, the state in which the reels are rotating, and the state in which the certain operation is being performed, the stop button causes the plurality of reels to stop in a second stop mode (for example, a replay role). The display of the management display may be configured not to start when the game is stopped at (symbol combination corresponding to (replay)).

With such a configuration, even if the reels are in a stopped state, when the reels are stopped in the second stop mode (replay stop mode) (because of the max bet state), it is determined that the game is in progress and the management display is displayed. Security can be improved by disabling the display of

Further, the first operation means may be means provided at a position that can be operated only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, only the manager of the game parlor can operate the first operating means, so fraudulent acts and the like can be reliably prevented.

<Display example 2 of management screen>
Next, display example 2 of the management screen will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13B is a diagram showing the flow of display example 2 of the management screen in chronological order.

The states shown in FIGS. 13(B)(1) to 13(B)(3) are the same states as the setting confirmation mode described using FIGS. 12(B)(1) to 12(B)(3). When the power supply state is ON, the front door 102 is in the open state, and the opening/closing sensor is in the open detection state, an operation (some operation) to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON is performed by the manager of the game parlor. , the management screen SD has started to be displayed. A detailed description of the same state is omitted to avoid redundant description.

<Management screen display example 2/Power status: Power ON → Power OFF>
The state shown in FIG. 13(B)(4) is the state where the power supply state shown in FIG. This is a state in which the power has changed from ON to OFF.

In this state, since the power supply state is OFF, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) are turned off, the output sound of the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) is not output, and the display means (liquid crystal display device) 157) is hidden.

<Management screen display example 2/setting key SW: ON→OFF>
The state shown in FIG. 13(B)(5) is the state shown in FIG. , and the setting key SW is turned off.

Since the power supply state is also OFF in the same state, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) are turned off, the output sound of the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) is not output, and the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is turned off. ) are hidden.

<Management screen display example 2/Power status: Power OFF → Power ON>
The states shown in FIGS. 13B and 13B and 13B and 13B and 13B and 13B and 13B and 13B is the power OFF state, respectively, and the power SW is operated by the manager of the amusement arcade, and the power state changes to the power state. This is a state in which the power has changed from OFF to ON.

The slot machine 100 turns off the power while the management screen SD (management display) is displayed, and then turns the setting key SW from ON to OFF (cancels a certain operation) to turn the power on. When set to , the management display is started to be displayed without performing the certain operation.

More specifically, the main control unit 300 determines that the state before the power failure in step S205 of the main control unit initial setting process described with reference to FIG. If no command has been sent, it is determined whether the setting key SW is ON or OFF, and if it is OFF, a setting confirmation start command indicating to start setting confirmation is sent to the first sub-controller 400. do.

When receiving this setting confirmation start command from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 executes processing for starting display of the management screen. As a result, as shown in FIG. 13(B)(6), the management screen SD is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157).

As described above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 or pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) includes display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) and A door that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1), a detection means that can detect the open/closed state of the door (for example, an open/close sensor shown in FIG. 1), and an operation (for example, , an operation from OFF to ON by rotating), and a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate (for example, a reels 110 to 112 shown), and a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and a game provided with a platform, wherein the detection means is means capable of changing the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state; means for enabling a detection state to become an open detection state; said display means being means for displaying a management display for an administrator; , referred to as a "first state"), when the certain operation is performed, the management display can be started to be displayed, and in the first state, the reel rotates. is configured not to start displaying the management display even if the certain operation is performed in the first state, the state in which the reel is rotating, and the certain operation is being performed, when the plurality of reels are stopped in a first stop mode (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to a small combination (bell)) by the stop button, the display of the management display is started. When the management display (for example, the management screen SD shown in FIG. 13(B)(3)) is displayed, the certain operation is canceled after the power is turned off. When the power is turned on, the management display (for example, the management screen SD shown in FIG. 13(B)(6)) starts to be displayed without performing the certain operation. It's a playground.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, if a certain operation is performed on the first operating means during a game (for example, while reels are spinning or medals are being bet), cheating is performed. Since there is a possibility that the management display is not displayed while the reel is rotating even if the door is in an open state, security can be improved. In addition, if the management display is not correctly terminated, even if the power is turned on, the management display is displayed, thereby making it possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy to use for the game clerk.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) includes display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) and light emitting means (for example, various lamps 420 ( an upper lamp, a lower lamp, a side lamp 144, a title panel 162 lamp, etc.)), a door body (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) that is provided on the front surface of the game table and can be opened and closed, and opening and closing of the door body Detecting means capable of detecting the state (for example, the open/close sensor shown in FIG. 1), and first operating means (for example, the setting key SW ), a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 1) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate, and provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels to rotate the reels. A game machine comprising a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) for individually stopping the game machine, wherein the detecting means detects a closed detection state when the door body is in a closed state. said detection means is means capable of changing the detection state to an open detection state when said door body is in an open state; and said display means is a means for administrator means capable of displaying a display for management, and when the certain operation is performed when the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state (hereinafter referred to as "first state"), the display for management is displayed. The management display is configured to be able to start displaying, and is configured not to start displaying the management display even if the certain operation is performed in the first state in which the reels are rotating. In the first state, the state in which the reels are rotating, and the state in which the certain operation is being performed, the stop button causes the plurality of reels to stop in a first stop mode (for example, small When the symbol combination corresponding to the combination (bell) is stopped, the display of the management display is started, and after the power is turned off while the management display is being displayed, When the certain operation is canceled and the power is turned on, the management display starts to be displayed without performing the certain operation, and the light emitting means is in a state in which a game can be played, and the detecting means is capable of emitting light in a first light emission mode (e.g., open light emission mode) when the detection state of is the open detection state, and the light emission means is displaying the management display and the detection state of the detection means is In the open detection state, the first light emission mode and the light emitting means emits light in a second light emitting mode (e.g., light emitting mode during stop, light emitting mode during play) when the game is possible and the detection state of the detecting means is the closed detection state. and the light emitting means is turned off when the management display is being displayed and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, if a certain operation is performed on the first operating means during a game (for example, while reels are spinning or medals are being bet), cheating is performed. Since there is a possibility that the management display is not displayed while the reel is rotating even if the door is in an open state, security can be improved.

In addition, if the management display is not correctly terminated, even if the power is turned on, the management display is displayed, thereby making it possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy to use for the game clerk.

Further, the light emitting means emits the first light when the game is available and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state, and when the management display is being displayed and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state. in a state in which a game can be played and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, light emission is possible in the second light emission mode, while the display for management is being displayed and the detection means When the detection state of is the closed detection state, the light emitting means is extinguished while continuing to display the management display. This makes it possible to improve convenience for the administrator, such as preventing forgetting to turn off the display for management.

Sound output means (for example, speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 2) is provided, and the sound output means outputs ( It is possible to output an opening sound (for example, a voice saying "the door is open") that informs that the door is in an open state, and the light emitting means is capable of outputting an opening sound (for example, a voice saying "the door is open"), and the light emitting means is during the display of the management display. The opening sound may be stopped when the detection state of the detection means is the closing detection state.

In addition, in the first state, the state in which the reels are rotating, and the state in which the certain operation is being performed, the stop button causes the plurality of reels to stop in a second stop mode (for example, a replay role). The display of the management display may be configured not to start when the game is stopped at (symbol combination corresponding to (replay)).

With such a configuration, even if the reels are in a stopped state, when the reels are stopped in the second stop mode (replay stop mode) (because of the max bet state), it is determined that the game is in progress and the management display is displayed. Security can be improved by disabling the display of

Further, the first operation means may be means provided at a position that can be operated only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, only the manager of the game parlor can operate the first operating means, so fraudulent acts and the like can be reliably prevented.

<Display example 3 of management screen>
Next, display example 3 of the management screen will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14A is a diagram showing the flow of display example 3 of the management screen in chronological order.

<Management screen display example 3/reel operation status: in operation>
The state shown in FIG. 14(A)(1) is a state in which the front door 102 is in the closed state, the open/close sensor is in the closed detection state, and the reel operation state is in operation (at least one of the reels 110 to 112 is rotating). state).

In this state, since the reel operation state is in operation, the light emitter (various lamps 420, etc.) emits light in a game light emission mode, and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) outputs and displays the game BGM. In the display area of the means (liquid crystal display device 157), an effect during the game is displayed.

<Management screen display example 3/front door: door closed → door open>
14A and 14B, the front door 102 is opened and the front door 102 moves from the door closed state to the door closed state described with reference to FIG. 14A(1). It is in an open state.

In the same state, since the front door 102 is in the door body open state, the light emitter (various lamps 420, etc.) emits light in an open light emission mode, and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) outputs an opening sound. Then, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, the effect during the game is continued.

<Management screen display example 3/Turn ON the setting key SW during reel rotation>
The state shown in FIG. 14(A)(3) is that the reel operation state shown in FIG. This is a state in which the administrator has performed an operation (certain operation) to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON, and the setting key SW has been turned ON.

The slot machine 100 is in a state in which the front door 102 (door body) is open, the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is the open detection state (first state), and the reels 110 to 112 are rotating. , even if an operation (some operation) to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON is performed, the state in which the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode) is not entered, and the management screen (management display) is displayed. Configured to never start showing.

More specifically, in steps S602 and S603 of the set value confirmation process described with reference to FIG. It is not a state in which the number of medals (three in this example) is betted, or a replay state by replay), the open/close sensor is not in a closed detection state, and one of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating. If it is determined that the error is not being reported) and the setting key SW is ON, the current setting value is displayed using the setting value display device 101a in subsequent step S604.

In this example, since one of the reels 110 to 112 is rotating and it is not the set value confirmation effective period, the set value confirmation process is terminated and the subsequent step S604 is not executed. No setting value is displayed in 101a. In addition, since the processing of step S605 is not executed, the setting confirmation start command indicating the start of setting confirmation is not transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, so the display as shown in FIG. 14(A)(3) In the display area of the means (liquid crystal display device 157), the display of the management screen SD is not started, and the effect during the game is continued.

<Management screen display example 3/reel operation status: operating → stopped>
The state shown in FIGS. 14A and 14B is that the reel operation state shown in FIG. A third stop operation (stop operation) is performed by the administrator, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped.

In the same state, a small winning combination (Bell) is internally won, and a third stop operation (stop operation) is performed. A combination (in this example, a “Bell-Bell-Bell” pattern combination) is displayed, and as shown in FIGS. (Bell) A prize-winning notification display ND1 (in this example, a display of a bell pattern image and a character string "GET!!") is displayed to suggest that the player has won a prize.

In the state shown in FIG. 14(A)(4), since the front door 102 is in the door body open state, the light emitter (various lamps 420, etc.) emits light in an open light emission mode, and the sound output means (speaker 272 , 277) outputs an opening sound, but the present invention is not limited to this. The means (speakers 272, 277) may output a winning notification sound suggesting that a winning combination has been won (the same applies to other embodiments).

<Management screen display example 3/Management screen display>
The state shown in FIGS. 14A and 14(5) is a state in which the display of the management screen SD is started after winning the small winning combination (bell) described with reference to FIG. 14(A) and (4).

In the slot machine 100, the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state and the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is an open detection state (first state), the reels 110 to 112 are rotating, and In a state in which an operation (a certain operation) is being performed to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON, the plurality of reels 110 to 112 are set in a first stop mode (in this example, When the game is stopped at a symbol combination corresponding to a small combination (bell), the management screen SD (management display) starts to be displayed.

More specifically, in steps S602 and S603 of the set value confirmation process described with reference to FIG. It is not a state in which the number of medals (three in this example) is betted, or a replay state by replay), the open/close sensor is not in a closed detection state, and one of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating. If it is determined that the error is not being reported) and the setting key SW is ON, the current setting value is displayed using the setting value display device 101a in subsequent step S604.

In this example, since it is the setting value confirmation effective period and the setting key SW is ON, the setting value display device 101a displays a number indicating the current setting value.

Subsequently, in step S605 of the setting value confirmation process, the main control unit 300 transmits a setting confirmation start command indicating to start setting confirmation to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 When the setting confirmation start command is received from the main control unit 300, the processing for starting the display of the management screen is executed. As a result, the management screen SD is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157), as shown in FIGS.

As described above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 or pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) includes display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) and A door that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1), a detection means that can detect the open/closed state of the door (for example, an open/close sensor shown in FIG. 1), and an operation (for example, , an operation from OFF to ON by rotating), and a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate (for example, a reels 110 to 112 shown), and a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and a game provided with a platform, wherein the detection means is means capable of changing the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state; means for enabling a detection state to become an open detection state; said display means being means for displaying a management display for an administrator; , referred to as a "first state"), when the certain operation is performed, the management display can be started to be displayed, and in the first state, the reel rotates. is configured not to start displaying the management display even if the certain operation is performed in the first state, the state in which the reel is rotating, and the certain operation is being performed, when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to a small combination (bell)) by the stop button, the management display (for example, the figure 14(A)(5), the gaming machine is configured to start displaying a management screen (SD) shown in (5).

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, if a certain operation is performed on the first operating means during a game (for example, while reels are spinning or medals are being bet), cheating is performed. Since there is a possibility that the management display is not displayed while the reel is rotating even if the door is in an open state, security can be improved.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) includes display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) and sound output means (for example, (speakers 272, 277 shown), a door body (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) that is provided on the front surface of the game table and can be opened and closed, and a detection means that can detect the open/closed state of the door body (for example, FIG. 1), a first operation means (for example, setting key SW) capable of performing a certain operation (for example, an operation to turn it from OFF to ON by rotating it), and a second operation means (for example, A cross button 193 shown in FIG. 1), a third operating means (for example, a volume adjustment SW for administrator), and a plurality of reels (for example, the reel shown in FIG. 110 to 112), and a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels. The detection means is means capable of changing the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state, and the detection means detects when the door body is in the open state. The display means is means capable of displaying a management display for an administrator, and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state (hereinafter referred to as "open detection state"). When the certain operation is performed in the first state"), the management display can be started to be displayed, and the first state is the state in which the reels are rotating. is configured not to start displaying the management display even if the certain operation is performed, and the first state, the state in which the reel is rotating, and the certain operation are performed. 14 ( A) It is configured to start displaying the management screen SD) shown in (5), and the second operating means is configured to start displaying the door body in either the open state or the closed state. is a means provided at a position where the second operation means can be operated, and is configured to be able to change the volume of the sound output from the sound output means when the second operation means is operated. , during the display of the management display, the display means displays the management display and the volume value display (For example, the volume value display VD2 shown in FIG. 19(B)(2)) can be displayed, but the volume cannot be changed by the operation of the second operating means. The operation means is means provided at a position that can be operated only when the door body is in the open state, and the operation by the third operation means is performed even during the display of the management display. The gaming machine is characterized in that the volume can be changed when the game is played.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, if a certain operation is performed on the first operating means during a game (for example, while reels are spinning or medals are being bet), cheating is performed. Since there is a possibility that the management display is not displayed while the reel is rotating even if the door is in an open state, security can be improved.

In addition, it is possible to check the operation of the volume value display even while the display for management is being displayed, so that convenience for the manager of the game parlor can be improved.

In addition, while the management display is being displayed, the management display and the volume value display can be displayed. While the volume cannot be adjusted by operating the second operating means, if the third operating means provided in a position where operation is possible only when the door is in the open state is operated, the volume cannot be adjusted. Therefore, when the manager needs to display the management display for some reason while the player is playing a game, the player or the manager may accidentally operate the second operation means. There is no need to worry about the set volume being changed, and the set volume can be visually checked at any time by the user's own operation, and the administrator can change the volume according to the situation. Yes, and very convenient.

The first operation means may be means provided at a position that can be operated only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, only the manager of the game parlor can operate the first operating means, so fraudulent acts and the like can be reliably prevented.

Further, the sound output means (for example, the speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 2) and the second operation means (for example, the cross button 193 shown in FIG. 1) are provided, and the operation by the second operation means is performed. and the display means displays a volume value ( For example, the volume value display VD2) shown in FIG. 19(B)(2) can be displayed. The sound volume output from the sound output means may be configured so as not to be changed even if the second operation means is operated (see, for example, FIG. 19(B)(3)).

With such a configuration, it is possible to check the operation of the volume value display even while the display for management is being displayed, and the convenience of the manager of the game parlor can be improved.

Further, the second operation means may be means provided at a position where the door body can be operated in either the open state or the closed state.

With such a configuration, not only the manager of the game parlor but also the player can adjust the volume, thereby enhancing convenience for the player.

<Display example 4 of management screen>
Next, display example 4 of the management screen will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14B is a diagram showing the flow of display example 4 of the management screen in chronological order.

The states shown in FIGS. 14(B)(1) to 14(B)(3) are the same states as the setting confirmation mode described using FIGS. 14(A)(1) to 14(A)(3). When the power supply state is ON, the front door 102 is in the open state, and the opening/closing sensor is in the open detection state, an operation (some operation) to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON is performed by the manager of the game parlor. However, since the reels 110 to 112 are rotating (the reel operating state is operating), the management screen SD is not displayed. A detailed description of the same state is omitted to avoid redundant description.

<Management screen display example 4/reel operation status: operating → stopped>
The state shown in FIG. 14(B)(4) is that the reel operation state shown in FIG. A third stop operation (stop operation) is performed by the administrator, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped.

In the same state, the replay combination (replay) is internally won, and the third stop operation (stop operation) is performed. (in this example, the symbol combination of "replay-replay-replay") is displayed, the replay state is entered, and the display means (liquid crystal In the display area of the display device 157), a winning notification display ND2 (in this example, an image of a replay symbol and a character string "GET!!") indicating that a replay has been won is displayed. is doing.

<Management screen display example 4/Hide management screen>
The state shown in FIG. 14(B)(5) is the state after winning of the replay combination explained with reference to FIG. 14(A)(4).

In the slot machine 100, the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state and the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is an open detection state (first state), the reels 110 to 112 are rotating, and In a state in which an operation (a certain operation) is being performed to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON, the plurality of reels 110 to 112 are set to the second stop mode (in this example, When the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role (replay) is stopped, the display of the management screen SD (management display) is configured not to start.
More specifically, in steps S602 and S603 of the set value confirmation process described with reference to FIG. It is not a state in which the number of medals (three in this example) is betted, or a replay state by replay), the open/close sensor is not in a closed detection state, and one of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating. If it is determined that the error is not being reported) and the setting key SW is ON, the current setting value is displayed using the setting value display device 101a in subsequent step S604.

In this example, since it is a replay state (MAX bet state) due to replay, and it is not the set value confirmation effective period, the set value confirmation process is terminated, and the subsequent step S604 is not executed, so the set value display device No setting value is displayed in 101a. In addition, since the process of step S605 is not executed, the setting confirmation start command indicating the start of setting confirmation is not transmitted to the first sub-controller 400. As shown in 14(B)(5), the display of the management screen SD is not started, and the during-game effect is continued.

According to this example, in the first state (the front door 102 is in the open state and the open/close sensor is in the open detection state), the reel is rotating, and a certain operation is being performed. , when the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode (symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination (replay) in this example) by the stop button, the management display is not started to be displayed. Therefore, even if the reels are in the stopped state, if the reels are stopped in the second stop mode (replay stop mode) (because it becomes a max bet state), it is determined that the game is in progress and the management display cannot be started. By doing so, security can be improved.

<Display example 5 of management screen>
Next, display example 5 of the management screen will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15A is a diagram showing the flow of display example 5 of the management screen in chronological order.

<Management screen display example 5/door closing state, medal insertion>
In the state shown in FIG. 15(A)(1), the setting key SW is ON, the front door 102 is in the closed state, and the open/close sensor is in the closed detection state. has started.

In this state, since medals have been inserted, a background image (in this example, a moving image of a character walking at night) is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157). Since the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the light emitting means (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in a light emission mode during stop (for example, a mode different from the open light emission mode and the light emission mode at the time of winning, which will be described later).

<Management screen display example 5/door open, start lever ON>
The state shown in FIG. 15(A)(2) is the state where the front door 102 is opened and the front door 102 is closed, and the front door 102 is closed and the medal is inserted. In this state, the closed state is changed to the open state of the door body, and the start lever 135 is operated by the manager of the amusement arcade or the like.

In the same state, since the front door 102 is in the door body open state, the light emitting means (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an open light emission mode to notify that the front door 102 is in the door body open state (for example, , the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 flash), and an opening sound (in this example, "the door is open output.

In addition, in the same state, since the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 start to rotate, and a game effect (in this example, the A dialogue effect composed of a plurality of lines uttered by a character such as an old man) is started, and a sound (in this example, , dialogue effect SE).

<Management screen display example 5/reel stop (bell winning)>
In the state shown in FIG. 15(A)(3), the third stop operation (stop operation) is performed by the manager of the amusement arcade or the like while the reel operation state shown in FIG. 15(A)(2) is in operation. The reels 110 to 112 are stopped and the bell is won.

In the same state, a small winning combination (Bell) is internally won, and a third stop operation (stop operation) is performed. A combination (first stop mode; in this example, a combination of “Bell-Bell-Bell” symbols) is displayed, and a game effect (in this example, dialogue effect) is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) ) continue.

Also, in this state, since a small win (bell) is won and the front door 102 is in the open state of the door body, part of the light emitting means emits light in an open light emission mode (for example, the upper lamp 142 or the side lamp 144) continues, and another part of the light emitting means (eg, the reel backlight of each reel 110 to 112) is changed to a bell emission mode (eg, yellow ) to emit light. In addition, the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) produce an opening sound (in this example, the sound "the door is open") and a sound corresponding to the game effect (in this example, a dialogue effect) (in this example, , dialogue voice) are continuously output, and a voice (in this example, a prize winning sound) is output to notify that a small winning combination (bell) has been won.

<Management screen display example 5/Management screen display>
The state shown in FIG. 15(A)(4) is the state where the display of the management screen SD is started after winning the small winning combination (bell) described with reference to FIG. 15(A)(3).

In the slot machine 100 of this example, the door body (in this example, the front door 102) is in an open state, the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is an open detection state (first state), and the reels 110 to 112 is rotating and a certain operation (in this example, an operation to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON) is being performed, by pressing the stop button (stop buttons 137 to 139 in this example) When the plurality of reels 110 to 112 are stopped in the first stop mode (in this example, a combination of symbols corresponding to a small combination (bell)), a management display (in this example, a management screen SD) is displayed. configured to start.

In the state shown in FIG. 15(A)(4), the front door 102 is open, the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is the open detection state (first state), and the reels 110 to 112 are rotating. and the operation (certain operation) of turning the setting key SW from OFF to ON is performed, the plurality of reels 110 to 112 are first stopped by the stop buttons 137 to 139 (stop buttons). Since it is in a state immediately after being stopped in a mode (in this example, a symbol combination corresponding to a small winning combination (bell)), the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) as shown in FIG. The management screen SD is displayed in the display area of .

In this example, by operating the cross key 193b or the OK button 193a while the management screen SD is displayed, "power saving setting", "time setting", "error/setting history", "LED operation Items such as "check" can be arbitrarily selected, and when the item "LED operation check" is selected, the confirmation operation of the light emitting means is started.

In the slot machine 100 of this example, the door body (in this example, the front door 102) is in an open state, the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is an open detection state (first state), and the reels 110 112 is rotating and a certain operation (in this example, an operation to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON) is performed, a stop button (in this example, stop buttons 137 to 139). When a plurality of reels 110 to 112 are stopped in the first stop mode (in this example, a combination of symbols corresponding to a small combination (bell)), a management display (in this example, a management screen SD) is displayed. may be ended before the start of the game effect, and the game effect may be interrupted with the start of the display of the management display.

In the state shown in FIG. 15(A)(4), the front door 102 is open, the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is the open detection state (first state), and the reels 110 to 112 are rotating. A plurality of reels 110 are pressed by a stop button (stop buttons 137 to 139 in this example) while a certain operation (in this example, an operation to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON) is being performed. 112 is stopped in the first stop mode (in this example, a combination of symbols corresponding to a small combination (bell)), so before starting the display of the management display (in this example, the management screen SD) The winning effect (in this example, the winning effect of the bell emission mode by the light emitting means (reel backlight of each reel 110 to 112), the winning sound by the sound output means (speakers 272, 277)) is ended, and the management display Along with the start of the display, the game effect (in this example, the dialogue effect by the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) and the dialogue sound by the sound output means (speakers 272, 277)) is interrupted.

According to this example, when shifting to the display for management after the reels are stopped, before shifting to the display for management, a winning effect that suggests (informs) a winning combination of which the player is highly interested (highly important). By ending it (not ending it in the middle), it becomes easier to recognize the winning effect, and even if the display for management is shifted irregularly, the winning combination can be correctly recognized.

It should be noted that the "first stop mode" according to the present invention is not limited to a symbol combination corresponding to a small combination (bell), but may be a symbol combination corresponding to other winning combinations such as watermelon and cherry. Alternatively, it may be a specific symbol combination that does not correspond to a winning combination.

In addition, although the example of "game production" is interrupted when the management display starts, it may be always interrupted when the management display starts. When a game effect can be executed, one, a plurality, or all of a plurality of types of game effects may be interrupted, or at least part of the game effect may be interrupted. Alternatively, one, a plurality, or all of the effects using the display means, the effects using the light emitting means, the effects using the sound output means, the effects using the movable means, etc. may be interrupted, It may be configured such that a program whose performance time is longer than a predetermined time is interrupted and a program whose performance time is shorter than the predetermined time is not interrupted.

In addition, although the example in which the "winning effect" ends before the display of the management display starts, it may always end before the management display is displayed, and multiple types of winning effects may be used. is executable, one, a plurality, or all of a plurality of types of winning effects may be terminated, or at least a portion of the winning effects may be terminated. , production using display means, production using light emitting means, production using sound output means, production using movable means, etc., one, more than one, or all of them may be finished, and the production time It may be configured so that the game with the performance time longer than the predetermined time ends, and the game with the performance time shorter than the predetermined time does not end.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) includes effect means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, the speaker 272 shown in FIG. 277, various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, etc.); , detecting means (for example, an open/close sensor shown in FIG. 1) capable of detecting the open/closed state of the door body; a setting key SW), a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 1) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate, and the reels provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels. A plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) for individually stopping the rotation of the game machine, wherein the production means is a game production (for example, FIG. 15 (A) (3) , etc., a dialogue effect by display means (liquid crystal display device 157), a dialogue sound by sound output means (speakers 272, 277), an effect that starts with reel rotation, and a background in which a character is walking across a plurality of games. effect, a continuous effect executed over a plurality of games, a development effect, etc.) can be executed, and the effect means can execute a winning effect (for example, FIG. 15 (A) ( 3), etc., the winning effect of the bell emission mode by the light emitting means (reel backlight of each reel 110 to 112) and the winning sound by the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) can be executed, and the detection means means for enabling a detection state to be in a closed detection state when the door body is in a closed state, and wherein the detection means changes the detection state to an open detection state when the door body is in an open state. A predetermined operation regarding the detection means (for example, inserting a light shielding piece of a certain length between the light emitting part and the light receiving part of the open/close sensor of the main body 101 and fixing it with tape etc. operation) is performed, the detection state of the detection means is set to the closed detection state even when the door body is in the open state. 1, wherein the display means is means capable of displaying a management display for an administrator, and the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the above open detection state (hereinafter referred to as “first state”. ), when the certain operation is performed, the management display can be started to be displayed, and in the first state in which the reel is rotating, the certain operation is is configured not to start the display of the management display even if it is performed, and in the state in which the certain operation is being performed in the first state and the state in which the reel is rotating, When the plurality of reels are stopped in a first stop mode (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to a small combination (bell)) by the stop button, the display of the management display is started, When the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode by the stop button in the first state and the state in which the reels are rotating and the certain operation is being performed, A gaming machine characterized in that the management display is started after the winning performance is executed to the end and terminated , and the game performance is interrupted along with the start of the management display. be.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, for example, even if the fraudulent person performs a predetermined operation to open the door body while the detection state of the detection means is in the closed detection state, the display for management cannot be confirmed. By doing so, security can be improved. Further, after the display for management is displayed, the display for management is continued even if the door opening sensor is in the closing detection state, thereby providing a game machine that is easy to use for the game clerk. It becomes possible.

Further, when shifting to the management display after the reels are stopped, by ending the winning effect suggesting (notifying) the winning combination of which the player is highly interested (highly important) before shifting to the management display. (By not ending it in the middle), it becomes easier to recognize the winning effect, and even if the display for management is changed irregularly, the winning combination can be correctly recognized.

Further, even when the detection state of the detection means changes from the open detection state to the closed detection state while the management display is displayed, the display of the management display (for example, FIG. 13 (A) It is configured to continue the management screen SD shown in (4)), and the effect means includes light emitting means (for example, various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, etc.), and the light emitting means is in a state in which a game can be played and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state (for example, the state shown in FIG. 13(A) (2)). Light can be emitted in one light emission mode (for example, an open light emission mode), and the light emission means is capable of displaying the management display and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state (for example, FIG. 13A). ) in the state shown in (3)), the light can be emitted in the first light emission mode, the light emission means is in a state in which a game can be played, and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state (for example, FIG. 13 (A) (5)), it is possible to emit light in a second light emission mode (for example, light emission mode during stop, light emission mode during play), and the light emission means is displaying the management display. The light may be extinguished when the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state (for example, the state shown in FIG. 13(A)(4)).

With such a configuration, the light emitting means is in a state where a game can be played and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state, and when the display for management is being displayed and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state. In the above, when light can be emitted in the first light emission mode, a game can be played, and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, light emission is possible in the second light emission mode, while the management display is displayed. When the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, the light emission means is extinguished while the display of the management display is continued. In addition, the light emitting means can reliably grasp that the detection state of the detection means has changed to the closed detection state while the management display is being displayed, preventing the administrator from forgetting to turn off the management display. Convenience can be improved.

Further, the winning effect is a effect using at least the light emitting means, and the game effect is
It may be an effect using at least the display means. Further, the effect means includes sound output means (for example, speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 2), the winning effect is effect using at least the sound output means, and the game effect is at least the sound output. It may be a production using means. Further, the effect means includes sound output means (for example, speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 2), the winning effect is effect using at least the sound output means, and the game effect is at least the display means. It may be a production using

<Display example 6 of management screen>
Next, display example 6 of the management screen will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15B is a diagram showing the flow of display example 6 of the management screen in chronological order.

The states shown in FIGS. 15(B)(1) to 15(B)(2) are the same as the states described using FIGS. 15(A)(1) to 15(A)(2). Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted, and the drawings after FIG. 15(B)(3) will be described below.

<Management screen display example 6/reel stop (replay winning)>
In the state shown in FIG. 15(B)(3), the third stop operation (stop operation) is performed by the manager of the amusement arcade or the like while the reel operation state shown in FIG. 15(B)(2) is in operation. The reels 110 to 112 are stopped and the replay is won.

In the same state, the replay combination (replay) is internally won, and the third stop operation (stop operation) is performed. The symbol combination (second stop mode. In this example, the symbol combination of "replay-replay-replay") is displayed, and the game effect (in this example, dialogue performance) continues.

In addition, in the same state, since a replay is won and the front door 102 is in the open state of the door body, part of the light emitting means emits light in an open light emission mode (for example, the upper lamp 142 and the side light). blinking of the lamp 144) continues, and another part of the light emitting means (eg, the reel backlight of each reel 110 to 112) is used to notify that the replay combination (replay) has been won. , red). In addition, the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) produce an opening sound (in this example, the sound "the door is open") and a sound corresponding to the game effect (in this example, a dialogue effect) (in this example, , dialogue voice) are continuously output, and a voice (in this example, a prize winning sound) is output to inform that the replay role has been won.

<Management screen display example 6/Management screen display>
The state shown in FIG. 15(B)(4) is the state after winning of the replay combination (reply) explained with reference to FIG. 15(B)(3).

In the slot machine 100 of this example, the door body (in this example, the front door 102) is in an open state, the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is an open detection state (first state), and the reels 110 to 112 is rotating and a certain operation (in this example, an operation to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON) is being performed, by pressing the stop button (stop buttons 137 to 139 in this example) When the plurality of reels 110 to 112 are stopped in the second stop mode (symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination (reply) in this example), a management display (in this example, management screen SD) is displayed. is configured not to start

In the state shown in FIG. 15(B)(4), the front door 102 is open, the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is the open detection state (first state), and the reels 110 to 112 are rotating. and the operation (certain operation) of turning the setting key SW from OFF to ON is performed, the plurality of reels 110 to 112 are stopped by the stop buttons 137 to 139 (stop buttons). Since it is in a state immediately after being stopped in a mode (in this example, a symbol combination corresponding to a replay combination (reply)), as shown in FIG. ), without displaying the management screen SD, the winning effect (in this example, the winning effect of the replay light emission mode by the light emitting means (reel backlight of each reel 110 to 112), the sound output means (speaker 272 , 277)) and game effects (in this example, dialogue effects by display means (liquid crystal display device 157), dialogue sounds by sound output means (speakers 272, 277)) are continuously executed without interruption. do.

The "second stop mode" according to the present invention is not limited to a symbol combination corresponding to a replay combination, and may be a symbol combination corresponding to another winning combination. It may be a specific symbol combination that does not correspond to a winning combination.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) includes display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) and light emitting means (for example, various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, etc.); Detecting means (for example, the open/close sensor shown in FIG. 1) capable of detecting the open/closed state of the door body, and operating means (for example, a setting key) capable of performing a certain operation (for example, an operation to turn it from OFF to ON by rotating it). SW), a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 1) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate, and a plurality of reels provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels to rotate the reels. and a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) for individually stopping the door body, wherein the detection means detects that the detection state is closed detection when the door body is in the closed state The detection means is means capable of changing the detection state to an open detection state when the door body is in the open state, and a predetermined operation ( For example, an operation of inserting a light shielding piece of a certain length between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the open/close sensor of the main body 101 and fixing it with tape or the like is performed, so that the door body is in the open state. The detection state of the detection means is configured to be the closed detection state even if the door body is in the closed state, the display means is means capable of displaying a management display for an administrator, and the door body is in the open state. and when the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state (hereinafter referred to as the "first state"), when the certain operation is performed, the display of the management display can be started. and in the first state in which the reels are rotating, even if the certain operation is performed, the display of the management display is not started, and the first state, the reels are rotating, and the certain operation is being performed, the stop button causes the plurality of reels to correspond to a first stop mode (for example, a small combination (bell) symbol combination), the display of the management display is started, and the certain operation is performed in the first state and the state in which the reels are rotating. in a state where the plurality of When the reels are stopped in a second stop mode (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to a replay combination), the display of the management display is not started, and the door body is configured to stop the opening. and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, even if the certain operation is performed, the display of the management display cannot be started, and the management display is displayed. Even if the detection state of the detection means changes from the open detection state to the closed detection state in the state of being closed, the display of the management display (for example, the management display shown in FIG. 13 (A) (4) screen SD), the light emitting means is in a state in which a game can be played and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state (for example, the state shown in FIG. 13 (A) (2)). Light can be emitted in one light emission mode (for example, an open light emission mode), and the light emission means is capable of displaying the management display and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state (for example, FIG. 13A). ) in the state shown in (3)), the light can be emitted in the first light emission mode, the light emission means is in a state in which a game can be played, and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state (for example, FIG. 13 (A) (5)), it is possible to emit light in a second light emission mode (for example, light emission mode during stop, light emission mode during play), and the light emission means is displaying the management display. The gaming machine is characterized in that the detection state of the detection means turns off when the detection state is the closed detection state (for example, the state shown in FIG. 13(A)(4)).

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, for example, even if the fraudulent person performs a predetermined operation to open the door body while the detection state of the detection means is in the closed detection state, the display for management cannot be confirmed. By doing so, security can be improved. Further, after the display for management is displayed, the display for management is continued even if the door opening sensor is in the closing detection state, thereby providing a game machine that is easy to use for the game clerk. It becomes possible.

Further, the light emitting means emits the first light when the game is available and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state, and when the management display is being displayed and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state. in a state in which a game can be played and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, light emission is possible in the second light emission mode, while the display for management is being displayed and the detection means When the detection state of is the closed detection state, the light emitting means is extinguished while the display of the management display is continued. It is possible to reliably grasp by the light emitting means that the detection state of the detection means has changed to the closed detection state while the display is being displayed, and it is possible to improve the convenience of the administrator, such as preventing forgetting to turn off the display for management. can.

<Error notification display example 1>
Next, display example 1 of error notification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16A is a diagram showing the flow of error notification display example 1 in chronological order.

<Error notification display example 1/reel operating status: operating (error non-detected status)>
The state shown in FIG. 16(A)(1) is a state in which the front door 102 is in the closed state, the open/close sensor is in the closed detection state, and the reel operation state is in operation (at least one of the reels 110 to 112 is rotating). state) and error non-detection state.

In this state, since the reel operation state is in operation, the light emitter (various lamps 420, etc.) emits light in a game light emission mode, and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) outputs and displays the game BGM. In the display area of the means (liquid crystal display device 157), an effect during the game is displayed.

<Error notification display example 1/reel operation status: operating (error detection status)>
In the state shown in FIG. 16(A)(2), an error occurs in the reel operating state shown in FIG. state.

The slot machine 100 is in a state in which the front door 102 (door body) is open, the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is the open detection state (first state), and the reels 110 to 112 are rotating. , even if a certain error (in this example, medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error)) is detected, the display of the error notification (error display) is not started.

More specifically, when each error is detected in step S701 of the other device monitoring process described using FIG. In this example, when it is determined that the setting is not being changed, any of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating), and each error is not being notified, in the following step S704, the error notification start process to run.

The state shown in FIG. 16 (A) (2) is a state in which the reel operating state is in operation (a state in which at least one of the reels 110 to 112 is rotating), and is not an error reporting possible period, so other devices The monitoring process is ended, and the in-game effect is continued as shown in FIG. 16(A)(2) without starting the error notification.

<Error notification display example 3/reel operation status: operating → stopped>
In the state shown in FIG. 16(A)(3), when the reel operation state shown in FIG. is performed and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped.

In the same state, a small winning combination (Bell) is internally won, and a third stop operation (stop operation) is performed. A combination (in this example, a “Bell-Bell-Bell” pattern combination) is displayed, and as shown in FIG. (Bell) A prize-winning notification display ND1 (in this example, a display of a bell pattern image and a character string "GET!!") is displayed to suggest that the player has won a prize.

In addition, the luminous body (various lamps 420, etc.) emits light in a bell emission mode that suggests that a small winning combination (bell) has been won, and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) has won a small winning combination (bell). Outputs a suggestive bell sound effect.

<Error notification display example 1/Error notification display>
The state shown in FIG. 16(A)(4) is a state in which the display of the error notification ER is started after winning the small combination (bell) described with reference to FIG. 16(A)(3).

In the slot machine 100, the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state and the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is an open detection state (first state), the reels 110 to 112 are rotating, and In a state where a certain error (in this example, medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error)) is detected, the stop buttons 137 to 139 (stop button) cause the plurality of reels 110 to 112 to stop in the first stop mode (this In the example, when it is stopped at a symbol combination corresponding to a small combination (bell), it is configured to start displaying an error notification ER (error display),
More specifically, when each error is detected in step S701 of the other device monitoring process described using FIG. In this example, if it is determined that the setting is not being changed and any of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating) and each error is not being notified, the error notification is started in the following step S704. do.

Since the state shown in FIG. 16(A)(4) is the error notification enabled period, the main control unit 300 executes the error notification start process. In this error notification start process, an error code is displayed on the payout number display 127, and an error command corresponding to the detected error is transmitted to the first sub-control section 400. The first sub-control section 400 sends the error command is received from the main control unit 300, processing for starting error notification is executed.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 16(A)(4), the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) displays the error notification ER (in this example, the character string "selector error has occurred!"). , and the display of the character string "Please call the game clerk.") is displayed. In addition, in the same state, the light emitter (various lamps 420, etc.) emits light in an error light emission mode, and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) emits an error sound (for example, "An error has occurred. Please call a game clerk. ”) is output.

In addition, the mode of error notification is not limited to this example. , the content of the error may be notified step by step by executing a second error notification that can identify the content of the error (for example, display of a character string "Selector error has occurred!") .

Also, as shown in FIG. 16(A)(2'), when the front door 102 (door body) is in the open state and the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is in the open detection state (first state). When a certain error (in this example, medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error)) is detected while the reels 110 to 112 are rotating, a special error notification (error display) is started to be displayed. can be configured to Further, in this case, even if there is an operation (error cancellation operation) by the reset switch while the reels 110 to 112 are rotating, the error may not be canceled.

As described above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 or pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) includes display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) and A door that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1), a detection means that can detect the open/closed state of the door (for example, an open/close sensor shown in FIG. 1), and an operation (for example, , an operation from OFF to ON by rotating), and a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate (for example, a reels 110 to 112 shown), and a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and a game provided with a platform, wherein the detection means is means capable of changing the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state; means for enabling a detection state to become an open detection state; said display means being means for displaying a management display for an administrator; , referred to as a "first state"), when the certain operation is performed, the management display can be started to be displayed, and in the first state, the reel rotates. is configured not to start displaying the management display even if the certain operation is performed in the first state, the state in which the reel is rotating, and the certain operation is being performed, when the plurality of reels are stopped in a first stop mode (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to a small combination (bell)) by the stop button, the display of the management display is started. When an error (for example, medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error)) is detected while the reel is stopped, an error display related to the error is displayed. In the first state where the reel is rotating, even if the certain error is detected, the display of the error display is not started. , the first state, the state in which the reels are rotating, and the state in which the certain error is detected, the stop button causes the plurality of reels to stop in the first stop mode (for example, a small win (bell ) stop at the symbol combination corresponding to ) 16(A)(4), the display of the error notification ER shown in FIG. 16(A)(4) is started.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, if a certain operation is performed on the first operating means during a game (for example, while reels are spinning or medals are being bet), cheating is performed. Since there is a possibility that the management display is not displayed while the reel is rotating even if the door is in an open state, security can be improved. In addition, even if an error occurs during the game (for example, while the reels are spinning or medals are being bet), the error notification is not started, and when the game is stopped, the error notification is started immediately, thereby improving security. can be improved.

In addition, in the first state, the state in which the reels are rotating, and the state in which the certain operation is being performed, the stop button causes the plurality of reels to stop in a second stop mode (for example, a replay role). The display of the management display may be configured not to start when the game is stopped at (symbol combination corresponding to (replay)).

With such a configuration, even if the reels are in a stopped state, when the reels are stopped in the second stop mode (replay stop mode) (because of the max bet state), it is determined that the game is in progress and the management display is displayed. Security can be improved by disabling the display of

Further, the first operation means may be means provided at a position that can be operated only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, only the manager of the game parlor can operate the first operating means, so fraudulent acts and the like can be reliably prevented.

<Error notification display example 2>
Next, a display example 2 of the error notification will be described with reference to FIG. 16(B). FIG. 16B is a diagram showing the flow of error notification display example 2 in chronological order.

The states shown in FIGS. 16(B)(1) to 16(B)(2) are the same states as the error detection states described using FIGS. 16(A)(1) to 16(A)(2). This is a state in which an error occurs when the reel operation state is in operation (error non-detected state), and the error is detected. A detailed description of the same state is omitted to avoid redundant description.

<Error notification display example 2/reel operation status: operating → stopped>
In the state shown in FIG. 16(B)(3), when the reel operation state shown in FIG. 16(B)(2) is in operation (error detection state), a third stop operation (stop operation) is is performed and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped.

In the same state, the replay combination (replay) is internally won, and the third stop operation (stop operation) is performed. (in this example, the symbol combination of "replay-replay-replay") is displayed, and as shown in FIG. A winning notification display ND2 (in this example, an image of a replay symbol and a character string "GET!!") is displayed to suggest that the player has won the replay combination (replay).

In addition, the light emitting body (various lamps 420, etc.) emits light in a replay light emission mode that suggests that the replay role (replay) has been won, and from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) to the replay role (replay) Outputs a replay sound effect suggesting that the player has won a prize.

<Error notification display example 2/Error notification display>
The state shown in FIG. 16(A)(4) is a state in which the display of the error notification ER is started after winning the replay combination (replay) explained using FIG. 16(A)(3).

In the slot machine 100, the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state and the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is an open detection state (first state), the reels 110 to 112 are rotating, and In a state where a certain error (in this example, medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error)) is detected, the stop buttons 137 to 139 (stop button) cause the plurality of reels 110 to 112 to switch to the second stop mode (this In the example, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is stopped, the display of the error notification ER (error display) is started.
More specifically, when each error is detected in step S701 of the other device monitoring process described using FIG. In this example, if it is determined that the setting is not being changed and any of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating) and each error is not being notified, the error notification is started in the following step S704. do.

The state shown in FIG. 16(B)(4) is a replay state by replay, but since it is also an error notification possible period, the main control unit 300 executes error notification start processing. In this error notification start process, an error code is displayed on the payout number display 127, and an error command corresponding to the detected error is transmitted to the first sub-control section 400. The first sub-control section 400 sends the error command is received from the main control unit 300, processing for starting error notification is executed.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 16(A)(4), the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) displays the error notification ER (in this example, the character string "selector error has occurred!"). , and the display of the character string "Please call the game clerk.") is displayed. In addition, in the same state, the light emitter (various lamps 420, etc.) emits light in an error light emission mode, and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) emits an error sound (for example, "An error has occurred. Please call a game clerk. ”) is output.

According to this example, in the first state, the state in which the reels are rotating, and the state in which a certain operation is being performed, the stop button causes the plurality of reels to switch to the second stop mode (replay in this example). When the symbol combination corresponding to the combination (replay) is stopped, the management display does not start to be displayed, but an error display is started. Even if an error occurs in the bet state), if the game is stopped without starting the error notification, the error notification is started immediately regardless of the stop state of the reels, thereby improving security. can.

<Display example 1 of management screen and error notification>
Next, display example 1 of the management screen and the error notification will be described with reference to FIG. 17(A). FIG. 17A is a diagram showing the flow of display example 1 of the management screen and the error notification in chronological order.

<Management screen and error notification display example 1/reel operation status: operating (error detection status)>
The state shown in FIG. 17(A)(1) is that the reel operation state is in operation, the front door 102 is in the open state, the open/close sensor is in the open detection state, and the error detection state, and the setting key SW is pressed by the manager of the amusement arcade. is turned ON from OFF (some operation), and the setting key SW is turned ON.

The slot machine 100 is in a state in which the front door 102 (door body) is open, the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is the open detection state (first state), and the reels 110 to 112 are rotating. , even if an operation (some operation) to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON is performed, the state in which the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode) is not entered, and the management screen (management display) is displayed. Configured to never start showing.

More specifically, in steps S602 and S603 of the set value confirmation process described with reference to FIG. It is not a state in which the number of medals (three in this example) is betted, or a replay state by replay), the open/close sensor is not in a closed detection state, and one of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating. If it is determined that the error is not being reported) and the setting key SW is ON, the current setting value is displayed using the setting value display device 101a in subsequent step S604.

In the state shown in FIG. 17(A)(1), one of the reels 110 to 112 is rotating and the set value confirmation valid period is not reached, so the set value confirmation process is terminated and the subsequent step S604 is processed. Since it is not executed, the setting value is not displayed on the setting value display device 101a. In addition, since the process of step S605 is not executed, the setting confirmation start command indicating the start of setting confirmation is not transmitted to the first sub-controller 400, so the display as shown in FIG. 17(A)(1) In the display area of the means (liquid crystal display device 157), the display of the management screen SD is not started, and the effect during the game is continued.

In the slot machine 100, the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state, the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is an open detection state (first state), and the reels 110 to 112 rotate. In this state, even if a certain error (in this example, medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error)) is detected, the display of the error notification ER (error display) is not started.

More specifically, when each error is detected in step S701 of the other device monitoring process described using FIG. In this example, when it is determined that the setting is not being changed, any of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating), and each error is not being notified, in the following step S704, the error notification start process to run.

The state shown in FIG. 17 (A) (1) is a state in which the reel operation state is in operation (a state in which at least one of the reels 110 to 112 is rotating), and is not an error notification possible period, so other devices The performance during the game is continued without ending the monitoring process and starting the error notification.

<Management screen and error notification display example 1/reel operation status: operating → stopped>
In the state shown in FIG. 17(A)(2), during operation (error detection state) of the reel operation state shown in FIG. is performed and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped.

In the same state, a small winning combination (Bell) is internally won, and a third stop operation (stop operation) is performed. A combination (in this example, a “Bell-Bell-Bell” pattern combination) is displayed, and as shown in FIG. (Bell) A prize-winning notification display ND1 (in this example, a display of a bell pattern image and a character string "GET!!") is displayed to suggest that the player has won a prize.

<Management screen and error notification display example 1/Error notification display>
The state shown in FIG. 17(A)(3) is a state in which the display of the error notification ER is started after winning the small combination (bell) described with reference to FIG. 17(A)(2).

In the slot machine 100, the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state, the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is an open detection state (first state), and the operation of turning the setting key SW from OFF to ON (or operation is being performed), and a state (second state) in which an error (in this example, medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error)) is detected, the stop buttons 137 to 139 (stop button) to stop the plurality of reels 110 to 112, the display of the management screen SD (management display) does not start, but the display of the error notification ER (error display) starts.

More specifically, when each error is detected in step S701 of the other device monitoring process described using FIG. In this example, if it is determined that the setting is not being changed and any of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating) and each error is not being notified, the error notification is started in the following step S704. do.

Since the state shown in FIG. 17(A)(3) is the error notification enabled period, the main control unit 300 executes the error notification start process. In this error notification start process, an error code is displayed on the payout number display 127, and an error command corresponding to the detected error is transmitted to the first sub-control section 400. The first sub-control section 400 sends the error command is received from the main control unit 300, processing for starting error notification is executed.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 17(A)(3), the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) displays the error notification ER (in this example, the character string "selector error has occurred!"). , and the display of the character string "Please call the game clerk.") is displayed. In addition, in the same state, the light emitter (various lamps 420, etc.) emits light in an error light emission mode, and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) emits an error sound (for example, "An error has occurred. Please call a game clerk. ”) is output.

<Management screen and error notification display example 1/Error detected state → Error not detected state>
The state shown in FIG. 17(A)(4) is a state in which the error detection state shown in FIG. 17(A)(3) has changed to an error non-detection state.

In this state, after the medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error) has been resolved and the error detection state has changed to the error non-detection state, the error cancellation operation is performed by the reset SW.

In the same state, since the front door 102 is open, the light emitter (various lamps 420, etc.) emits light in an open light emission mode, and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) outputs an opening sound. Since the detection state has become an error non-detection state, the display of the preparing screen is started.

More specifically, after the main control unit 300 determines that the error notification end condition is satisfied in step S706 of the other device monitoring process described with reference to FIG. If it is determined that there is, in step S709, a preparation screen display command for instructing start of display of the preparation screen is transmitted to the first sub-controller 400. FIG. When the first sub-controller 400 receives this preparation screen display command from the main controller 300, the first sub-controller 400 displays the preparation screen until it becomes possible to display the management screen, or it is possible to display the management screen. Even if it is, for a predetermined period of time, the process of displaying the screen during preparation, etc. is executed.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 17(A)(4), in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, after the error notification ER is finished, the display of the management display SD is being prepared. The display of the screen (in this example, the display of the character string "Preparing display for management") is started. Note that the screen before displaying the management screen SD is not limited to this example, and may be the same screen as part of the in-game effect, or the same screen as part of the in-stop effect, for example. good too.

<Display example 1 of management screen and error notification/display of management screen>
The state shown in FIG. 17(A)(5) is a state in which an error cancellation operation is performed by the reset SW after the error non-detected state shown in FIG. 17(A)(4), and the display of the management screen is started. .

In the slot machine 100, the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state, the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is an open detection state (first state), and the operation of turning the setting key SW from OFF to ON (or operation is being performed), and a state (second state) in which an error (in this example, medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error)) is detected, the stop buttons 137 to 139 (stop button) stops a plurality of reels, starts displaying an error notification ER (error display), and enters a state where a certain error (in this example, medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error)) has not been detected. When the reset SW (second operating means) is operated later, the display of the error notification ER (error display) and the preparation screen is terminated, and the display of the management screen SD (management display) is started. It is configured.

More specifically, in steps S602 and S603 of the set value confirmation process described with reference to FIG. It is not a state in which the number of medals (three in this example) is betted, or a replay state by replay), the open/close sensor is not in a closed detection state, and one of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating. If it is determined that the error is not being reported) and the setting key SW is ON, the current setting value is displayed using the setting value display device 101a in subsequent step S604.

In this example, since it is the setting value confirmation effective period and the setting key SW is ON, the setting value display device 101a displays a number indicating the current setting value.

Subsequently, in step S605 of the setting value confirmation process, the main control unit 300 transmits a setting confirmation start command indicating to start setting confirmation to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 When the setting confirmation start command is received from the main control unit 300, the processing for starting the display of the management screen is executed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 17(A)(5), the management screen SD is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157).

As shown in FIG. 17(A)(4'), even if the error detection state is the error non-detection state, the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is the closed detection state. Even if an operation (error cancellation operation) is performed by SW (second operation means), the error cannot be canceled and the error notification ER may be continued.

Further, when the management screen SD is displayed during the display of the number of payouts, the display of the number of payouts may be ended. Further, even if a certain error occurs while the management screen SD is being displayed, it may be configured so as not to perform the error notification of the occurrence of the error.

As described above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 or pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) includes display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) and A door that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1), a detection means that can detect the open/closed state of the door (for example, an open/close sensor shown in FIG. 1), and an operation (for example, , an operation from OFF to ON by rotating), and a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate (for example, a reels 110 to 112 shown), and a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and a game provided with a platform, wherein the detection means is means capable of changing the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state; means for enabling a detection state to become an open detection state; said display means being means for displaying a management display for an administrator; , referred to as a "first state"), when the certain operation is performed, the management display can be started to be displayed, and in the first state, the reel rotates. Even if the certain operation is performed in the state where the reel is stopped, a certain error (for example, medal insertion error 1 (Medal Selector Error)) is detected, it is configured to be able to start displaying an error display related to the certain error, and in the first state and in a state in which the reel is rotating, the or the first state, the state in which the reel is rotating, the state in which the certain operation is being performed, and When the plurality of reels are stopped by the stop button in the state where the certain error is detected (hereinafter referred to as the "second state"), the display of the management display is not started, but the The gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured to start displaying an error display (for example, an error notification ER shown in FIG. 17(A)(3)).

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, when the reels are stopped, the error display is given priority over the management display, thereby improving security.

In addition, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) includes a display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) and the front face of the game machine, which can be opened and closed. A possible door (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1), a detection means (for example, an open/close sensor shown in FIG. 1) capable of detecting the open/closed state of the door, and a certain operation (for example, rotating) A first operation means (for example, setting key SW) and a second operation means (for example, reset SW), and a plurality of types of patterns are applied and driven to rotate. A plurality of reels (eg, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 1) and a plurality of stop buttons (eg, stop buttons) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels 137 to 139), wherein the detection means is means capable of changing the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state, and the detection means is: means for enabling the detection state to become an open detection state when the door body is in an open state; and the display means is means for displaying a management display for an administrator. When the certain operation is performed when the detection state is the open detection state (hereinafter referred to as the "first state"), the display of the management display can be started, and the display is set to the first state. and is configured not to start displaying the management display even if the certain operation is performed while the reel is rotating, and when the reel is stopped, or error (for example, medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error)) is detected, an error display related to the certain error can be started to be displayed, and the reel is in the first state and the In the rotating state, even if the certain error is detected, the display of the error indication is not started, and the first state, the state in which the reel is rotating, the When the plurality of reels are stopped by the stop button in a state in which an operation is being performed and a certain error is detected (hereinafter referred to as a "second state"), the management Although the display of the display is not started, it is configured to start the display of the error display (for example, the error notification ER shown in FIG. 17 (A) (3)), and in the second state, the plurality of of reels are stopped and the error table When the second operation means is operated after the error display is started and the error is not detected, the error display is terminated and the management display (for example, 17(A) (5), the display of the administrator screen SD) shown in FIG. When starting to display a display, a certain display (for example, a display containing a character string "preparing display for management" shown in FIG. 17(A)(4) before starting display of the display for management ), the certain display is a display that is not related to an error, and the certain operation is being performed and the power is turned on. is configured to start displaying the management display without starting the display of the certain display.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, when the reels are stopped, the error display is given priority over the management display, thereby improving security.

In addition, when an operation is performed by the second operation means to end the display of the error display and start the display of the management display, before starting the display of the management display, the display related to the error However, in a state where a certain operation is being performed and the power is turned on, the management display is displayed without starting the display of the certain display. Therefore, by starting to display a certain display before starting to display the management display, it is possible to perform an operation to cancel the display of the management display during the period in which the certain display is being displayed. It is possible, for example, during the operation of the amusement arcade, if there is a risk that the display of the management display will start due to an erroneous operation, etc., the management display that is not desirable to be shown to the player will be terminated without displaying it. On the other hand, since setting change operations (certain operations and turning on the power) are basically performed when the amusement arcade is not open, a certain display is not displayed, and a management display is displayed. By displaying, it is possible to quickly start displaying the display for management, and it is possible to enhance convenience for the administrator.

A second operation means (for example, a reset switch) is provided, and in the second state, the plurality of reels are stopped by the stop button, the error display is started, and the certain error is detected. When an operation is performed by the second operation means after the state is not set, the display of the error display is ended, and the management display (for example, the administrator screen shown in FIG. 17(A) (5) SD) may be configured to start displaying.

With such a configuration, by canceling the error and displaying the display for management after the end of the error display, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy to use for the game clerk.

Further, when an operation is performed by the second operation means, the display of the error display is terminated, and the display of the management display is started, a certain display ( For example, it may be configured to start the display of the preparation screen shown in FIG. 17(A)(4).

With such a configuration, it is possible to visually recognize that the second operation means has been accepted, and convenience for the manager of the gaming parlor can be enhanced.

Further, the first operation means may be means provided at a position that can be operated only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, only the manager of the game parlor can operate the first operating means, so fraudulent acts and the like can be reliably prevented.

Further, the second operation means may be means provided at a position that can be operated only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, it is possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts, etc., since only the manager of the game parlor can operate the second operating means.

<Display example 2 of management screen and error notification>
Next, a display example 2 of the management screen and the error notification will be described with reference to FIG. 17(B). FIG. 17B is a diagram showing the flow of display example 2 of the management screen and the error notification in chronological order.

<Management screen and error notification display example 2/Turn on the setting key SW when the power is turned off>
In the state shown in FIG. 17(B)(1), the setting key SW is pressed by the manager of the amusement arcade when the power supply is OFF, the front door 102 is open, the opening/closing sensor is detecting an open state, and an error is detected. This is a state in which an operation (a certain operation) has been performed to turn from OFF to ON, and the setting key SW has been turned ON.

In this state, an error is detected, but since the power state is power OFF, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) are turned off, and the output sound of the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) is not output. , the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is non-display.

<Display example 2 of management screen and error notification/starting setting change mode, display of management screen>
In the state shown in FIG. 17(B)(2), the setting key SW is in the ON state described with reference to FIG. This is a state in which the power state has changed from power OFF to power ON.

The slot machine 100 is configured to shift to a state in which setting values can be changed (setting change mode) when the power is turned on in a state in which the setting key SW is turned ON from OFF. Then, in the same state, the state shifts to a state in which the setting value can be changed (setting change mode), and a setting change sound is output from the sound output means (speakers 272 and 277).

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 17(B)(2), since the front door 102 is open, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an open light emission mode.

Further, in the slot machine 100, the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state, the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is an open detection state (first state), and the operation of turning the setting key SW from OFF to ON is performed. When the power is turned on in a state where (a certain operation) is being performed and a certain error (in this example, medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error)) is detected (second state), The display of the error notification ER (error display) is not started, but the display of the management screen (management display) is started.

More specifically, in steps S203 and S204 of the initial setting process described with reference to FIG. 7 is started. In this example, the setting change process is started because the front door 102 is open and the setting key SW is ON.

Subsequently, in step S302 of the setting change process, the main control unit 300 transmits a setting change start command indicating to start changing the setting to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 When a setting change start command is received from the main control unit 300, a process for starting display of the management screen is executed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 17B(2), the management screen SD is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157).

Subsequently, in step S304 of the setting change process, the main control unit 300 displays the current set values using the set value display device 101a.

<Management screen and error notification display example 2/Set value>
The state shown in FIG. 17(B)(3) is a state in which the start lever 135 is operated by the administrator of the amusement arcade in the setting change mode.

If the main control unit 300 determines in step S307 of the setting change process that the start lever 135 has been operated, in subsequent steps S308 and S309, the setting value displayed on the setting value display device 101a is changed. , is stored (confirmed) as a new set value, and the display of the set value display device 101a is erased to hide the set value.

<Management screen and error notification display example 2/Error notification display>
The state shown in FIG. 17(B)(4) is a state in which the display of the error notification ER is started after the set values shown in FIG. 17(B)(3) are determined.

In the slot machine 100, the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state, the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is an open detection state (first state), and the operation of turning the setting key SW from OFF to ON (or operation) is being performed, and a certain error (in this example, medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error)) is detected (second state), the start lever 135 is operated. After that, when the operation (certain operation) to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON is released, the display of the management screen (management display) is terminated and the display of the error notification ER (error display) is started. is configured to

More specifically, when each error is detected in step S701 of the other device monitoring process described using FIG. In this example, if it is determined that the setting is not being changed and any of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating) and each error is not being notified, the error notification is started in the following step S704. do.

Since the state shown in FIG. 17(B)(4) is the error notification enabled period, the main control unit 300 executes the error notification start process. In this error notification start process, an error code is displayed on the payout number display 127, and an error command corresponding to the detected error is transmitted to the first sub-control section 400. The first sub-control section 400 sends the error command is received from the main control unit 300, processing for starting error notification is executed.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 17(B)(4), the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) displays an error notification ER (in this example, a character string "selector error has occurred!"). , and the display of the character string "Please call the game clerk.") is displayed. In addition, in the same state, the light emitter (various lamps 420, etc.) emits light in an error light emission mode, and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) emits an error sound (for example, "An error has occurred. Please call a game clerk. ”) is output.

As described above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 or pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) includes display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) and A door that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1), a detection means that can detect the open/closed state of the door (for example, an open/close sensor shown in FIG. 1), and an operation (for example, , an operation from OFF to ON by rotating), and a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate (for example, a reels 110 to 112 shown), and a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and a game provided with a platform, wherein the detection means is means capable of changing the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state; means for enabling a detection state to become an open detection state; said display means being means for displaying a management display for an administrator; , "first state".), when the certain operation is performed, the display of the management display can be started, and a certain error (for example, medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error )) is detected, the first state, the state in which the certain operation is being performed, and the certain error are detected. (hereinafter referred to as "second state"), when the power is turned on, the display of the error display does not start, but the management display (for example, shown in FIG. 17B (2)) The gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured to start displaying a screen for administrator (SD).

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, when the power is turned on, the management display is given priority over the error display, thereby providing a user-friendly amusement machine for the manager of the amusement parlor. .

In addition, a start lever (for example, start lever 135) is provided, and when the certain operation is canceled after the start lever is operated in the second state, the display of the management display is terminated, It may be configured to start displaying the error display (for example, the error notification ER shown in FIG. 17(B)(4)).

With such a configuration, after the start lever is operated, the management screen can be terminated and the error display can be started, so that the occurrence of the error can be reliably notified.

Further, a second operating means (for example, a reset switch) is provided so that when the detection state of the detecting means is the closed detection state, the error cannot be cleared even if the second operating means is operated. It may be configured.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent fraudulent actions such as forcibly canceling the error state, thereby improving security.

Further, the first operation means may be means provided at a position that can be operated only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, only the manager of the game parlor can operate the first operating means, so fraudulent acts and the like can be reliably prevented.

Further, the second operation means may be means provided at a position that can be operated only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, it is possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts, etc., since only the manager of the game parlor can operate the second operating means.

<Display of setting history>
Next, the setting history display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18A is a diagram showing the flow of setting history display in chronological order.

The states shown in FIGS. 18(A)(1) to 18(A)(2) are the same states as the setting change mode described using FIGS. 12(A)(1) to 12(A)(2). This is a state in which the power is turned on in a state in which the operation to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON has been performed, and the state has shifted to a state in which setting values can be changed (setting change mode). A detailed description of the same state is omitted to avoid redundant description.

<Specific operations in setting history display/setting change mode>
The state shown in FIG. 18(A)(3) is a state in which a specific operation has been performed in the setting change mode and display of the setting history has started.

The display means (in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157) of the slot machine 100 provides a history display (in this example, the setting history SH) can be displayed, and when the first event (setting value confirmation due to setting change) occurs in a certain state (setting change mode in this example), the first event (setting change In a certain state (setting change mode) in which setting value confirmation has occurred, it is possible to display a history display (setting history SH) relating to the first event (setting value confirmation due to setting change) that occurred in the past.

In this example, the setting shown in FIG. Display history SH.

Although the display mode of the setting history SH is not particularly limited, in this example, the date and time when the setting change (or setting confirmation) was performed, the set value set (or confirmed) by the setting change (or setting confirmation), and the operation details. (setting change or setting confirmation) can be displayed in chronological order. (No. 2) Setting change/confirmation date and time: MM/DD/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM of MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/s/s to display (in reverse chronological (or chronological) order).

According to this example, it is possible to easily check the setting values and the like set in the past by the manager of the game parlor. Also, even if it is displayed by an illegal operation to the player, it is less likely to be used for fraud because the history display is not for the event that occurred this time, but for the event that occurred in the past.

<Confirmation of setting values in setting history display/setting change mode>
The state shown in FIG. 18(A)(4) is a state in which the start lever 135 is operated by the administrator of the amusement arcade in the setting change mode.

If the main control unit 300 determines in step S307 of the setting change process that the start lever 135 has been operated, in subsequent steps S308 and S309, the setting value displayed on the setting value display device 101a is changed. , is stored (confirmed) as a new setting value (here, setting 5), the display of the setting value display device 101a is erased, and the setting value is hidden.

In addition, the slot machine 100, when a first event (set value confirmation due to setting change) occurs in a certain state (setting change mode in this example), the first event (setting value change due to setting change) occurs. In a certain state (setting change mode) in which a setting change has occurred, it is not possible to display the history (setting history SH) related to the first event (set value confirmation by setting change) that has occurred this time.

According to this example, since the history of setting values due to the current setting change (the history display of the first event that occurred this time) is not displayed, for example, if the player illegally performs a setting change operation, the setting change It is possible to improve security by not being able to easily confirm whether or not the procedure has been performed correctly.

In the state shown in FIG. 18(A)(4), the setting key is kept ON, so the display of the setting history SH continues. In the example, the date and time when the setting was changed, the set value set by the setting change, and the content of the operation (setting change) are not displayed.

In addition, the slot machine 100, when a first event (set value confirmation due to setting change) occurs in a certain state (setting change mode in this example), the first event (setting value change due to setting change) occurs. In a certain state (setting change mode) in which a setting change has occurred, it is possible to erase at least a part of the history display (setting history SH) related to the first event (set value confirmation by setting change) that occurred in the past. On the other hand, the history display (setting history SH) relating to the first event (set value confirmation by setting change) that occurred this time cannot be erased.

Specifically, when the cross button 193 is operated to select and press the "delete history" button located below the setting history SH, at least a part of the past setting history SH (in this example, , only the setting history SH being displayed) is deleted.

According to this example, it is not possible to clear (delete) the history of the first event that occurred this time (history of setting values resulting from this setting change). security can be improved. In addition, if you want to clear the history of the first event that occurred this time (history of setting values due to this setting change), it is necessary to move to a certain state again, so the risk is high for the unauthorized person. Unauthorized acts can be prevented.

<Displaying the setting history/Exiting the setting change mode>
The state shown in FIG. 18(A)(5) is a state in which the setting key SW is turned OFF by an operation to turn the setting key SW from ON to OFF by the manager of the game parlor in the setting change mode.

When determining that the setting key SW is OFF in step S310 of the setting change process, the main control unit 300 transmits a setting change end command indicating to end the setting change to the first sub-control unit 400. When the first sub-controller 400 receives this setting change end command from the main controller 300, it executes a process of ending the display of the management screen.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 18A and 18(5), the setting history SH of the management screen SD displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is erased, and the normal effect is started. . In this example, since the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, an effect to be executed while the reels 110 to 112 are stopped is started as a normal effect.

<Displaying the setting history/starting the setting confirmation mode>
18(A)(6), the front door 102 shown in FIG. 18(A)(5) is in the door open state and the open/close sensor is in the open detection state. This is a state in which an operation (a certain operation) has been performed to turn from OFF to ON, and the setting key SW has been turned ON.

The slot machine 100 is configured to shift to a state in which setting values can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode) when an operation is performed to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON while the power is on. Then, in the same state, the state shifts to a state (setting confirmation mode) in which setting values can be confirmed.

Further, the slot machine 100 turns the setting key SW from OFF to ON when the front door 102 (door body) is in the open state and the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is the open detection state (first state). When an operation (a certain operation) is performed, the display of the management screen SD (management display) can be started, and the management screen SD is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157). However, in this example, since the setting history item was selected on the most recent management screen SD, as shown in FIG. Display SH.

In this example, since the setting value was changed to setting 5 in the most recent setting change mode (FIG. 18 (A) (4)), the setting history SH shows the first event that occurred in the past (setting value change ) as a history display corresponding to "(No. 3) setting change/confirmation date and time: XX year XX day XX hour XX minute XX seconds, setting value: 5, operation: change" and this setting confirmation mode As a history display corresponding to the confirmation of the setting value in , "(No. 4) Setting change/confirmation date and time: 0/0/0/0/0:00:00 seconds, setting value: 5, operation: confirmation" The history display is additionally displayed.

According to this example, it is possible to easily check the setting values and the like set in the past by the manager of the game parlor.

<Display error history>
Next, the error history display will be described with reference to FIG. 18(B). FIG. 18B is a diagram showing the flow of error history display in chronological order.

<Display error history/start setting confirmation mode>
In the state shown in FIG. 18(B)(1), the power supply is ON, the front door 102 is in the open state, and the opening/closing sensor is in the open detection state. This is a state in which an operation (a certain operation) has been performed to turn on the setting key SW.

The slot machine 100 is configured to shift to a state in which setting values can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode) when an operation is performed to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON while the power is on. Then, in the same state, the state shifts to a state (setting confirmation mode) in which setting values can be confirmed.

Further, the slot machine 100 turns the setting key SW from OFF to ON when the front door 102 (door body) is in the open state and the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is the open detection state (first state). Since the display of the management screen SD (management display) can be started when an operation (a certain operation) is performed, as shown in FIG. A management screen SD is displayed in the display area of the display device 157).

<Specific operations in error history display/setting confirmation mode>
The state shown in FIG. 18B(2) is a state in which a specific operation has been performed in the setting confirmation mode and display of the error history has started.

The display means (liquid crystal display device 157) of the slot machine 100 displays a history display (error history EH in this example) showing the history of occurrence of the second event (door opening or door closing in this example). It is possible, and when a second event (door opening or door closing) occurs in a certain state (in this example, setting confirmation mode), there is a certain In the state (setting confirmation mode), it is possible to display a history display (error history EH) relating to first events (door opening and door closing) that occurred this time and in the past.

More specifically, in step S502 of the device monitoring process described with reference to FIG. 9, main control unit 300 detects that the front door 102 has been opened when it detects a signal indicating an open detection state. In addition, the door open detection command indicating that the opening of the front door 102 has been detected is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 receives the door open detection command. is received from the main control unit 300, the opening detection information indicating that the opening of the front door 102 has been detected (in this example, information indicating "open" and the date and time of opening) is stored in the RAM 408 in chronological order as history information. , and performs door open notification.

On the other hand, in step S502 of the device monitoring process, when the main control unit 300 detects a signal indicating an open detection state, the main control unit 300 stores closure detection information indicating detection of closure of the front door 102 in the RAM 308. A door closure detection command indicating that the closure of the front door 102 has been detected is transmitted to the first sub-controller 400, and when the first sub-controller 400 receives this door closure detection command from the main controller 300, Closure detection information indicating that the closure of the front door 102 has been detected (in this example, information indicating "closed" and date and time of closure) is stored in the RAM 408 as historical information in chronological order.

In this example, when an error history item is selected from the menu display of the management screen SD by a specific operation (operation using the cross button 193), open detection information (information indicating “open” and open date and time) and closure detection information (information indicating “closed” and date and time of closure) are acquired from the RAM 408, and as shown in FIG. , the current and past error history EH is displayed.

The display mode of the error history EH is not particularly limited, but in this example, the date and time of error occurrence and the details of the error that occurred can be displayed in chronological order. _______________ error occurred: Selector error, (No.2) Date and time of error occurrence: ___________________________, Error occurred: Door open, (No.3) Date and time of error occurrence: __________ 〇Day 〇〇〇〇〇〇〇〇〇 on the door closed, (No.4) Date and time of error occurrence: 〇〇月〇〇〇〇〇〇〇〇〇〇〇 on 〇〇〇〇〇〇〇〇〇, Occurred in the past and this time. Display items related to errors that occurred in chronological order (in chronological order (newest (or oldest))).

<Error history display/Front door: Door open → Door closed>
In the state shown in FIG. 18B(3), the front door 102 is closed in the door body open state shown in FIG. It is in a state of

Even if the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) changes from the open detection state to the closed detection state while the error history EH (display for management) is displayed, the slot machine 100 displays the error history EH. (Management Display) is configured to be displayed continuously. In this example, since the setting value is being checked and the setting key SW is ON, the display of the error history EH is continued. Also, in the same state, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) that emit light in the open state are turned off, and the output sound of the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) that output the opening sound is set to non-output. .

In addition, since the front door 102 has changed from the door body open state to the door body closed state, the history display corresponding to the first event (door open error) that occurred this time is displayed in the error history EH as "(No. 5) error Occurrence date and time: XX, XX, XX, XX, XX (the date and time when the closure of the front door 102 was detected), Occurrence error: door closed” is additionally displayed.

According to this example, since the history of the opening and closing of the door can be displayed, it is possible to check the presence or absence of fraudulent acts and the past work status, etc., thereby enhancing the convenience of the manager of the amusement arcade. can be done.

<Displaying the error history/Exiting the setting confirmation mode>
The state shown in FIG. 18(B)(4) is a state in which the setting key SW is turned OFF in the setting confirmation mode when the operation to turn the setting key SW from ON to OFF is performed by the manager of the game parlor.

When determining that the setting key SW is OFF in step S606 of the setting value confirmation process, the main control unit 300 transmits a setting confirmation end command indicating to end the setting confirmation to the first sub-control unit 400. Then, when the first sub-controller 400 receives this setting confirmation end command from the main control unit 300, the first sub-controller 400 executes the process of ending the display of the management screen.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 18(B)(4), the error history EH displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is erased, and the normal effect is started. In this example, since the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, an effect to be executed while the reels 110 to 112 are stopped is started as a normal effect.

As described above, the amusement machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) is a game machine equipped with display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1). Then, the display means displays a history (for example, the setting history SH shown in FIG. 18(A)(3)) showing the history of the occurrence of the first event (for example, setting value confirmation due to setting change). Display is possible, and the display means displays a history (for example, error history EH shown in FIG. 18(B)(2)) showing a history of the occurrence of a second event (for example, door opening or door closing). can be displayed, and when the second event occurs in a certain state, in the certain state in which the second event occurred, display the history display related to the second event that occurred this time When the first event occurs in the certain state, in the certain state in which the first event occurred, the history display related to the first event that occurred this time is not displayed. The game machine is characterized in that it is possible.

In addition, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) includes display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1), operation means, and a game machine provided with an openable and closable door and detection means capable of detecting an open/closed state of the door, wherein the display means indicates a history of occurrence of a first event; A history display (for example, the setting history SH shown in FIG. 18(A)(3)) can be displayed, and the first event is that an operation for confirming a set value has been performed by the operation means. , the display means can display a history display showing a history of occurrence of the second event (for example, an error history EH shown in FIG. 18(B)(2)), and the detection means can display the door means for enabling the detection state to become the closure detection state when the body is in the closure state, the second event being that the detection state of the detection means becomes the closure detection state, and the The display means is means capable of displaying a management display for an administrator, and when the second event occurs while the management display is being displayed (hereinafter referred to as a "certain state") Furthermore, in the certain state in which the second event has occurred, the history display regarding the second event that has occurred this time can be displayed, and if the first event has occurred in the certain state, , in the state in which the first event occurred, the history display regarding the first event that occurred in the state in the past can be displayed, but the history display regarding the first event that occurred this time can be displayed The history display cannot be displayed, and in the certain state, the history related to the first event that occurred in the past can be erased by operating the operation means, but the history related to the first event that occurred this time can be deleted. The game machine is characterized in that the history cannot be erased.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to display the history display of the first event that occurred in a certain state in the past, but it is impossible to display the history display of the first event that occurred this time. In addition, the history of the first event that occurred in the past can be erased by operating the operating means, but the history of the first event that occurred this time cannot be erased. When a setting change operation is performed, it is not possible to easily confirm whether or not the setting change has been correctly performed, and it is difficult to destroy the evidence of the fraudulent act, so that security can be improved. In addition, if you want to delete the history related to the first event that occurred this time, you need to move to a certain state again and then delete it by operating the operation means. Actions can be prevented. On the other hand, since the history of the first event that occurred in a certain past state can be erased, unnecessary information can be arbitrarily deleted, and convenience for the administrator can be improved.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, since the history display (history of set values due to the setting change of this time) regarding the first event that occurred this time is not displayed, for example, if the player has illegally changed the setting In this case, it is possible to improve security by not being able to easily confirm whether or not the setting has been changed correctly.

Further, when the second event occurs in the certain state, in the certain state in which the second event occurred, the history display regarding the second event that occurred in the past can be displayed. and when the first event occurs in the certain state, in the certain state in which the first event occurred, the history display regarding the first event that occurred in the past can be displayed. There may be.

With such a configuration, it is possible to easily check the setting values set in the past by the administrator of the game parlor, so that it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy to use for the management of the amusement parlor. Also, even if it is displayed by a player through an illegal operation, it is less likely to be used for illegal acts because it is a history display of events that occurred in the past.

Further, when the first event occurs in the certain state, in the certain state in which the first event occurred, at least part of the history related to the first event that occurred in the past While erasable, the history relating to the first event that occurred this time may not be erasable.

With such a configuration, the history of the first event that occurred this time (history of set values due to the setting change this time) cannot be cleared, so if the setting is changed illegally, the evidence of the illegal act can be destroyed. is difficult, and security can be improved. In addition, if you want to clear the history of the first event that occurred this time (history of setting values due to this setting change), it is necessary to move to a certain state again, so the risk is high for the unauthorized person. Unauthorized acts can be prevented.

Further, an operation means may be provided, and the first event may be that an operation for confirming a set value is performed by the operation means.

With such a configuration, even if an operation to confirm the setting value is performed, the setting value confirmed by the operation is not displayed. In addition, since it is not possible to easily confirm whether or not the setting has been changed correctly, it is possible to improve security.

In addition, a door (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) that is provided on the front surface of the game table and that can be opened and closed, and a detection means (for example, an open/close sensor) capable of detecting the open/closed state of the door are provided. The detection means is means capable of changing the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state, and the second event is a detection state in which the detection state of the detection means changes to the closed detection state. state.

With such a configuration, it is possible to display the history of the opening and closing of the door body, so that it is possible to check the presence or absence of fraudulent acts and the past work status, etc., which improves the convenience of the manager of the game parlor. can be enhanced.

<Volume adjustment>
Next, volume adjustment will be described with reference to FIG.

<When the volume adjustment/management screen is not displayed>
FIG. 19A is a diagram showing the flow of volume adjustment in chronological order when the management screen is not displayed.

FIG. 19(A)(1) shows that the power supply is ON, the front door 102 is closed, and the opening/closing sensor is detecting closure, and the stop effect is being executed, and the management screen is not displayed. state.

In the same state, since the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in a stop light emission mode, and the stop BGM is output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277), In the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157), an effect during stop is displayed. In this example, the BGM during stop is output at a certain volume (volume 4 in this example).

FIG. 19(A)(2) shows a state in which a volume increase operation is performed by the player volume setting operation means (second operation means) while the volume value display VD is not displayed.

Here, the player volume setting means means a means (second For example, in addition to the cross button 193 (the up, down, right, or left button of the cross key 193a, or the OK button 193b) described with reference to FIG. This corresponds to a volume switch or the like provided in the device, or a touch panel or the like provided in display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 or sub-liquid crystal).

In the same state, in a state where the volume value display VD is not displayed, a volume increase operation (in this example, the upper button of the cross button 193 or Triggered by reception of a right button operation), the volume value display VD indicating the current volume value (in this example, volume 4) is started to be displayed, while the volume is not increased.

In this example, when a volume increase operation is received by the player volume setting operation means (second operation means), the display of the volume value display VD indicating the current volume value is started. Although the configuration is such that the volume is not increased, the volume may be increased while starting to display the volume value display VD indicating the current volume value.

Further, the volume increase operation by the player volume setting operation means (second operation means) is not limited to the operation by the up button or the right button of the cross button 193. For example, the operation by the up button of the cross button 193 The sound output means (speakers 272, 277) output sound volume increasing operation for increasing the volume output, and the operation by the right button of the cross button 193 is performed by the light output means (for example, the back of the reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 24). light, lamps such as the side lamp 144 shown in FIG. 24), or a music selection operation for right-scrolling a plurality of songs and selecting an arbitrary song. good.

Also, in this example, the increase in volume has been explained, but the decrease in volume is similarly performed by decreasing the volume output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) when the volume value display VD is not displayed. Triggered by the acceptance of the volume reduction operation (in this example, operation by the down button or left button of the cross button 193) for It is configured so that the volume is not decreased while the sound is started.

In this example, when the player's volume setting operation means (second operation means) receives a volume reduction operation, the display of the volume value display VD indicating the current volume value is started. Although the configuration is such that the volume is not decreased, the volume may be decreased while starting to display the volume value display VD indicating the current volume value.

Further, the volume reduction operation by the player volume setting operation means (second operation means) is not limited to the operation by the lower button or the left button of the cross button 193. For example, the operation by the lower button of the cross button 193 A volume reduction operation for increasing the volume output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) is performed, and the operation by the left button of the cross button 193 is performed by light output means (for example, the back of the reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 24). Light amount reduction operation for reducing the amount of light output from a light, a lamp such as the side lamp 144 shown in FIG. good.

In addition to the display of the volume value display VD, other displays (for example, display related to light intensity and music, menu display, power saving display, etc.) may be started.

Also, in this example, the volume increase operation (or volume decrease operation) by the player volume setting operation means (second operation means) has been described, but the player volume setting operation means (second operation means) The operation is not limited to this example, and the sound output from the sound output means (speakers 272 and 277 in this example) when the player volume setting operation means (second operation means) is operated. It is only required that the settings related to the volume of the device can be changed.

Here, the "settings related to volume" that can be performed when the player's volume setting operation means (second operation means) is operated means the current volume output from the sound output means. In addition to settings for changing (adjusting) , settings for changing (adjusting) the volume of a certain production to be started from now on, and multiple sounds output from the sound output means (for example, sound effects, settings for changing (adjusting) the volume of one, more or all of the sound (payout sound, winning sound, music, etc.), and the volume of the sound output from the sound output means when the power is turned on It may be one, a plurality, or all of the settings for returning to the initial set values of .

FIG. 19(A)(3) shows a state in which the volume increase operation is performed while the volume value display VD shown in FIG. 19(A)(2) is displayed.

In the same state, when the volume value display VD is displayed, the volume increase operation by the player volume setting operation means (second operation means) (in this example, the operation by the up button or the right button of the cross button 193) ) is received, the volume is increased by one step, and the volume value display VD indicating the increased volume value (in this example, volume 5) is displayed, and the increased volume value (in this example, , BGM is output during stop at volume 5).

In this example, the increase in volume has been explained, but the decrease in volume is similarly performed by performing a volume decrease operation (by the player volume setting operation means (second operation means) in a state where the volume value display VD is displayed). In this example, the operation of the down button or the left button of the cross button 193) is received, and the volume is decreased by one level, and the volume value display indicating the volume value after the decrease (volume 3 in this example). The VD is displayed, and the stopped BGM is output at the reduced volume value (volume 3 in this example).

<When the volume adjustment/management screen is displayed>
FIG. 19B is a diagram showing the flow of volume adjustment in time series when the management screen is displayed.

In FIG. 19B(1), the power supply is ON, the front door 102 is in the open state, and the open/close sensor is in the open detection state, the setting key SW is ON, and the management screen SD is displayed. is in a state of

In this state, since the front door 102 is in the open state of the door body, the light emitter (various lamps 420, etc.) emits light in an open light emission mode, the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) outputs an opening sound, and the liquid crystal A management screen SD is displayed in the display area of the display device 157, and in this example, an opening sound is output at a certain volume (volume 4 in this example).

Note that the opening sound and error sound may be output at a predetermined volume (for example, maximum volume) regardless of the set volume value.

FIG. 19B(2) shows a state in which the volume increase operation is performed while the management screen SD is being displayed and the volume value display VD2 is not displayed.

In this state, while the management screen SD is being displayed and the volume value display VD2 is not being displayed, a volume increase operation (this In this example, when an operation by the up button or right button of the cross button 193 is accepted, the display of the volume value display VD indicating the current volume value (volume 4 in this example) is started, while the volume is configured not to increase.

In this example, the increase in volume has been explained, but the decrease in volume is also performed by the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) while the management screen SD is being displayed and the volume value display VD is not being displayed. When a volume reduction operation (in this example, operation by the down button or left button of the cross button 193) for reducing the volume output from is received, the current volume value (in this example, volume 4) While the display of the volume value display VD indicating is started, the volume is not decreased.

In this example, when the management screen SD is being displayed and the volume value display VD is not displayed, the volume is increased (or decreased) by the player volume setting operation means (second operation means). operation) is performed, the display means (in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157) displays the management display (in this example, the management screen SD) and the volume-related display (in this example, the volume value display VD). Although it can be displayed, it is configured so that the volume cannot be changed by an operation by the player volume setting operation means (second operation means), but in addition to being unable to change the volume, the display related to the volume cannot be displayed. may be configured.

Moreover, even in the case of such a configuration, the operation by the second operation means is performed before the display of the display for management is started, and the display related to the volume is already displayed before the display of the display for administrator is started. In this case, until the conditions for erasing the volume-related display are satisfied (for example, until a certain period (eg, 3 seconds) has passed since the display of the volume-related display started), the volume-related The display may be configured to be displayed continuously.

FIG. 19(B)(3) shows a state in which the volume increase operation is performed while the volume value display VD2 shown in FIG. 19(B)(2) is displayed.

In this state, when the volume value display VD2 is displayed, the volume increase operation (in this example, the upper button or Right button operation) is accepted, but since the management screen SD is being displayed, the volume is not increased, and the volume value display VD indicating the current volume value (in this example, volume 4) is displayed. continue to display.

In this example, the increase in volume has been explained, but the decrease in volume is also similar to that for decreasing the volume output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) in the state where the volume value display VD2 is displayed. Even when a volume reduction operation (in this example, an operation with the down button or left button of the cross button 193) is received, the volume is not reduced because the management screen SD is being displayed. The volume value display VD indicating the volume value (volume 4 in this example) continues to be displayed.

As an operation means provided at a position that can be operated only when the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state, an administrator volume setting means (third operation means) may be provided. When a volume increase operation or a volume decrease operation is performed by the player volume setting operation means (third operation means) while the volume value display VD is displayed as shown in (A) (3) of the same figure. In addition, volume adjustment may be possible, and a volume value display VD indicating the volume value after volume adjustment may be displayed.

Here, the administrator's volume setting means is a means (third operation means) provided at a position that can be operated only when the door (in this example, the front door 102) is in the open state. For example, in addition to an administrator volume adjustment SW (volume SW) provided inside the main body 101, buttons and DIP switches provided inside and on the back of the main body 101, a touch panel provided inside the main body 101, etc. Applicable.

In addition to the display of the volume value display VD, another display (for example, display related to light intensity and music, menu display, power saving display, etc.) may be started.

In addition, the administrator volume setting operation means (third operation means) is not limited to an operation means capable of operating the volume increase operation and the volume decrease operation. Light amount increasing operation (or light amount decreasing operation) for increasing (or decreasing) the light amount output from the output means (for example, the backlight of the reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 24, the lamp such as the side lamp 144 shown in FIG. 24) ) or the like may be used. That is, when the administrator's volume setting operation means (third operation means) is operated, the setting related to the volume of the sound output from the sound output means (the speakers 272 and 277 in this example) is changed. It is sufficient if it is configured to be able to do so.

Here, the "settings related to volume" that can be performed when the administrator's volume setting operation means (third operation means) is performed means the current volume that is output (or will be) from the sound output means. In addition to settings for changing (adjusting) , settings for changing (adjusting) the volume of a certain production to be started from now on, and multiple sounds output from the sound output means (for example, sound effects, settings for changing (adjusting) the volume of one, more, or all of the sound (payout sound, winning sound, music, etc.), and setting the volume of the sound output from the sound output means to the initial value Settings for returning, setting the upper and lower limits of the volume that can be set by the player volume setting operation means (second operation means), setting the standard volume (initial setting value when the power is turned on), etc. It may be one, more than one, or all of them.

In addition, a volume value display that starts to be displayed when an operation by the player volume setting operation means (second operation means) is accepted, and an operation by the administrator volume setting operation means (third operation means) is accepted. The volume value display that starts to be displayed in the case may have the same display mode or may have a different display mode.

In the example shown in FIG. 19B, the front door 102 is in the open state, the open/close sensor is in the open detection state, the setting key SW is ON, and the management screen SD is displayed. state, when an operation is performed by the administrator volume setting operation means (third operation means), the setting related to the volume of the sound output from the sound output means (speakers 272 and 277 in this example) is changed. Although an example in which the front door 102 is enabled is shown, when the front door 102 is in the open state and the detection state of the open/close sensor is forced to be in the closed detection state (pseudo-closed state) by a predetermined operation, the administrator volume It may be configured such that even when an operation is performed by the setting operation means (third operation means), the settings related to the volume can be changed.

According to this example, the operation means (second operation means) provided on the front surface of the game machine cannot change the volume, and the operation means (third operation means) provided inside the game machine cannot change the volume. By making it possible to change the sound volume set by the player, the volume set by the player is prevented from being erroneously changed when the manager displays the management screen for some reason while the player is playing the game. It is possible to improve the convenience of the administrator by making it possible to change the volume while preventing the volume from being lost.

Further, when the display of the management screen SD is ended (erased) in the state shown in FIG. Seconds) may be configured such that the settings relating to the volume cannot be changed by the player's volume setting operation means (second operation means) until the time elapses. In this case, it is possible to display a volume-related display (for example, the volume value display VD shown in FIG. 19(B)(2)) by operating the player's volume setting operation means (second operation means). , or may be non-displayable.

At the timing immediately after the display for management ends, there is a high possibility that the manager is still touching the game machine. (means) is pressed, and volume change, etc. are expected to be executed in vain. By making it impossible to change the settings related to the volume by the second operation means, it is possible to prevent unnecessary volume changes, etc. It is possible to reduce unnecessary troubles (wasteful labor and man-hours).

Further, when the display of the management screen SD is ended (erased) in the state shown in FIG. Seconds) may be changed by operating the volume setting operation means (third operation means) for the administrator even before the time elapses. In this case, it is possible to display a volume-related display (for example, the volume value display VD shown in FIG. 19(B)(2)) by operating the administrator's volume setting operation means (third operation means). , or may be non-displayable.

At the timing immediately after the end of the management display, there is a high possibility that the manager is still touching the gaming machine. Even if there is, by making it possible to change the settings related to the sound volume by the third operation means, the work by the administrator becomes possible, and the convenience of the administrator can be enhanced.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) includes display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) and sound output means (for example, , speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 2), a door body (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) that is provided on the front surface of the game table and can be opened and closed, and detection means capable of detecting the open/closed state of the door body. (for example, the open/close sensor shown in FIG. 1), a first operation means (for example, setting key SW) capable of performing a certain operation (for example, an operation to turn it from OFF to ON by rotating it), and a second operation. means (for example, player volume setting operation means such as the cross button 193 shown in FIG. 1) and third operation means (for example, administrator volume setting operation means such as administrator volume adjustment SW) wherein the detection means is means capable of changing the detection state to a closed detection state when the door is in the closed state, and the detection means detects when the door is in the open state. In the case of, the detection state of the detection means can be in the open detection state, and the detection state of the detection means is maintained even when the door body is in the open state by performing a predetermined operation related to the detection means. is configured to be in the closed detection state, the display means is means capable of displaying a management display for an administrator, and when the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state, the certain When an operation is performed, the display for management can be started, and the second operation means can be operated regardless of whether the door body is in the open state or the closed state. and is configured to be able to change settings related to the volume of the sound output from the sound output means when an operation is performed by the second operation means, While the management display is being displayed, the display means can display the management display and a volume-related display (for example, the volume value display VD2 shown in FIG. 19(B)(2)). The third operation means is a means provided at a position where it can be operated only when the door body is in the open state, and the management Even during the display of the display, when the operation is performed by the third operation means, the setting related to the volume can be changed, and the door body is in the open state. When the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, an operation by the third operation means is performed. The gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured to be able to change the setting regarding the volume even when the game is played.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, the operation means (second operation means) provided on the front surface of the game machine cannot change the volume, and the operation means (third operation means) provided inside the game machine By making it possible to change the volume in the operation means), if the administrator displays the management screen for some reason while the player is playing, the volume set by the player may be erroneously set. The administrator's convenience can be enhanced by enabling the volume to be changed while preventing the volume from being changed.

Further, the first operation means may be means provided at a position that can be operated only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent erroneous operations by the player and to enhance the security of the management display for the administrator.

Further, even when the management display ends, the operation by the second operation means is not allowed until a first period (for example, 1 to 2 seconds) has passed after the management display ends. It may be configured such that the settings related to the volume cannot be changed by the user.

At the timing immediately after the display for management ends, there is a high possibility that the manager is still touching the game machine. (means) is pressed, and volume change, etc. are expected to be executed in vain. By making it impossible to change the settings related to the volume by the second operation means, it is possible to prevent unnecessary volume changes, etc. It is possible to reduce unnecessary troubles (wasteful labor and man-hours).

The in-game light-emitting mode of the light-emitting means described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 19 is a mode in which light is emitted according to the effect executed by the display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157) and the operation status of the reels. . In other words, the light emitting mode during game play of the light emitting means is not limited to a mode in which the light emitting means always emits light (or blinks), and may include a period in which the light emitting means is extinguished. For example, even during a game, the light emitting means may be turned off during a period in which the interlocking effect, the prize-winning effect, etc. are not performed, or even during the execution of the interlocking effect, etc. If the effect can be improved by including it, a period during which the light emitting means is extinguished may be provided. Conversely, in order to liven up the game during the bonus or AT, the light emitting means may always emit light or blink.

12 to 19, the mode of light emission while the light emitting means is stopped is not limited to the mode in which the light emitting means always emits light (or blinks), and includes a period in which the light emitting means is extinguished. You can For example, after the game stops (after the reels stop and the effect executed by the display means (for example, liquid crystal display device 157) ends) until the demonstration effect starts, the light emitting means is extinguished. may be

<Transition of game state of AT system>
Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the game state of the AT system will be described. FIG. 20 is a simple game flow showing an AT game state.

First, the game state of the AT system is roughly divided into a low navigation state and a high navigation state. A low navigation state is a state in which the probability of operation navigation being executed is low, and is also referred to as a normal mode, a non-advantageous section, a normal section, or a normal state. The high-navigation state is a state in which the probability that operation-navigation is executed is higher than in the low-navigation state (a state that is more advantageous than the low-navigation state (normal state) in terms of operation-navigation (notification of operation information)). It is also called an advantageous section or an advantageous state.

Here, operation navigation refers to an effect that notifies operation information (for example, correct operation order and stop operation timing) of the stop buttons 137 to 139 (operation means) in order to obtain medals and maintain an advantageous gaming state. No, for example, an effect for notifying the correct operation order of the winning combination (for example, an effect for displaying the characters "left→middle→right") is applicable.

When the stop operation is performed according to the operation content of the operation navigation, a result advantageous to the player is brought about, so the high navigation state is a game state more advantageous to the player than the low navigation state. Here, the term "advantageous" specifically refers to the total number of gaming media paid out by the gaming machine as compared to the total number of gaming media used by the player as the number of bets on the gaming machine when playing the game for a predetermined period of time. It means that the ratio, the so-called payout rate (ball output rate) is advantageous. In addition, the stock time and the CZ state are easier to shift to the CZ state and the AT state than the normal stage, so it can be said that the stock time and the CZ state are more advantageous than the normal stage.

In this example, the low navigation state is a state in which the execution probability of operation navigation is low, and the high navigation state is a state in which the execution probability of operation navigation is higher than in the low navigation state. The non-execution state and high-navigation state may be set to the state in which operation navigation is executed.

Each game state of the AT system is subdivided and managed, and is called an effect state. In this example, the production state of the low navigation state has a special stage, and the production state of the high navigation state is the stock time (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ST"), the normal stage, and the CZ state (compared to the normal stage). state), and the AT state. Among these production states, the AT state is, in principle, a state in which the number of balls to be paid out increases. Note that the effect state is not limited to this example, and for example, the high-navigation state may include other effect states such as a confirmation notification state, a pullback state, and the like.

In this embodiment, in the special stage of the low navigation state (normal section), if the condition (A) is established (in this example, if you win a winning combination other than losing), the high navigation state (advantageous section) Transition to stock time. It should be noted that after the RAM is cleared such as when the setting is changed, if the condition (A) is satisfied, it may be configured so as to shift to the stock time, or it may be configured not to shift.

Stock time (first game state) is a state in which a CZ lottery that can acquire the right to shift to the CZ state (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "CZ") or one or more CZ stocks is possible. .

In this stock time, even if the CZ lottery is won, the CZ state obtained by the CZ lottery will not be changed until the specified number of games in the stock time (first period. In this example, 50 games) has passed. Stock (accumulate).

Then, when the condition (B) is satisfied (in this example, when the stock time specified number of games (in this example, 50 games) has passed without stocking CZ), the stage shifts to the normal stage, When the condition (C) is established (in this example, when the stock time specified number of games (50 games in this example) has passed while CZ is stocked), the state shifts to the CZ state. It should be noted that the transition destination when the condition (C) is satisfied in the stock time is not limited to the CZ state.

Note that the conditions (B) and (C) for ending the stock time are not limited to this example, and may be less or more than 50 games.

According to this example, even if the CZ lottery is won (even if certain conditions are met), the CZ state (second gaming state) is maintained until the number of games specified in the stock time (first period) is completed. Since there is no shift, the game can be enjoyed over a long period of time in the number of games specified in the stock time (first period), and the interest in the game can be improved.

Also, when moving from a normal section to an advantageous section, until the number of games specified in the stock time has passed, there is no transition to the CZ state or AT state. It is possible to avoid a situation in which too many balls come out in a short time and the gambling property becomes higher than necessary when the next advantageous section is reached after passing through the section.

The normal stage has various performance stages, and is a state in which a CZ lottery that can acquire the right (CZ) to shift to the CZ state is possible.

In this normal stage, when the condition (D) is established (in this example, when the CZ is won), the CZ is not stocked, and the state is immediately shifted to the CZ state.

The CZ state (second game state) is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (special stage) in the low navigation state (normal section) or the normal stage in the high navigation state (advantageous section). (For example, it is easier to shift to AT state when winning a rare role in the CZ state than when winning a rare role in a normal stage, etc.) In this example, the weak CZ state (third game state) Then, there are a strong CZ state (fourth game state) and an AT determined CZ state (fourth game state). The strong CZ state is a state in which transition to the AT state is more likely than in the weak CZ state, and the AT definite CZ state is a state in which the AT state always transitions after the CZ state ends.

In the CZ state, when the condition (E) is satisfied (in this example, when the CZ predetermined number of games (9 games in this example) have passed without winning the AT in the CZ state), the normal stage is entered, When the condition (F) is established (in this example, when AT is won in the CZ state and a predetermined number of CZ games (9 games in this example) have passed), the state is shifted to the AT state.

It should be noted that conditions (E) and conditions (F), which are conditions for ending the CZ state, are not limited to this example, and may be less than or greater than 9 games. Number of games preferred. In addition, the CZ state may be ended by winning a specified number of specific winning combinations, or if the AT state is won, the state may be shifted to the AT state before the predetermined number of games has passed (CZ state may be terminated).

AT state is a state in which a predetermined number of AT games (for example, 1 set 30 games) can be played. This is an advantageous state for the player, and in this example, the normal AT, the AT addition state in which an additional lottery for the AT game is executed, and the ED state in which an ED (ending) effect indicating the end of the high navigation state is executed. There is

Also, in this AT state, a set continuation lottery (for example, a lottery with a winning probability of 1/4) is executed as to whether or not to continue the AT game, and when this set continuation lottery is won, a predetermined number of times (in this example, (1 set of 30 games) AT games are given, and the AT state is extended.

If the condition (G) is satisfied in this AT state (if the AT end condition is satisfied (in this example, if all games are completed in the AT state), or if the advantageous section end condition is satisfied (this example Then, when 1500 games have passed in the advantageous section, or when 2400 coins have been paid out in the advantageous section), the game shifts to a low navigation state (normal section) special stage.

It should be noted that the advantageous section end condition is an example, and may be the case where 3000 games have passed, or the case where 3000 coins have been paid out.

Also, in this example, the production state is the special stage in the low navigation state (normal section), but the production state may be the stock time or the normal stage even in the low navigation state (normal section). In other words, even in the low navigation state (normal section), if the production state is stock time (or / and normal stage), the stock time (or / and normal stage) is the period of low navigation state (normal section) There is a period of high navigation state (advantageous section). Conversely, the special stage may be continued even when the game transitions to a high navigation state (advantageous section).

<CZ lottery>
Next, the CZ lottery executed during the stock time and the normal stage will be described with reference to FIGS. 21(b) and (c).

The CZ lottery is a lottery in which the right (CZ) to move to the CZ state can be acquired. Cherry) is stop-displayed in the symbol display window 113, a CZ lottery using a CZ determination table, which will be described later, is executed.

The lottery mode of the CZ lottery includes a high-probability mode in which the probability of winning the CZ lottery is relatively high and a low-probability mode in which the probability of winning the CZ lottery is relatively low. When moving to a normal stage or stock time, the low probability mode is set first, but if you win a winning role (for example, a rare role with a low winning probability) in each production state, the high probability mode is set. be done.

<CZ lottery / normal stage>
FIG. 21(b) is a diagram showing an example of the CZ determination table used for the CZ lottery in the normal stage. For convenience of explanation, only the CZ determination table to be referred to when the setting value is setting 1 will be exemplified, but for setting 2 to setting 6, it is preferable that the higher the setting value, the higher the winning probability of the CZ lottery. (The same applies to the stock time CZ determination table).

In the normal stage (low-probability mode), when the symbol combination corresponding to the weak cherry is stopped and displayed in the symbol display window 113, the CZ lottery is won with a probability of 2% (the CZ is acquired), and the symbol corresponding to the watermelon is won. When the pattern combination is stop-displayed in the pattern display window 113, the CZ lottery is won with a probability of 1% (CZ is acquired), and the pattern combination corresponding to the chance is stop-displayed in the pattern display window 113. Then, when the CZ lottery is won with a probability of 6% (acquisition of CZ), and the pattern combination corresponding to the strong cherry is stopped and displayed in the pattern display window 113, the CZ lottery is won with a probability of 27% ( CZ).

In addition, in the normal stage (high probability mode), when the pattern combination corresponding to the weak cherry is stopped and displayed in the pattern display window 113, the CZ lottery is won with a probability of 13% (the CZ is obtained), and the watermelon is selected. When the corresponding pattern combination is stop-displayed in the pattern display window 113, the CZ lottery is won with a probability of 7% (the CZ is acquired), and the pattern combination corresponding to the chance is stop-displayed in the pattern display window 113. 20% probability of winning the CZ lottery (obtaining CZ), and 34% probability of winning the CZ lottery when the symbol combination corresponding to the strong cherry is stopped and displayed in the symbol display window 113. (acquire CZ).

<CZ Lottery / Stock Time>
FIG. 21(c) is a diagram showing an example of the CZ determination table used for the CZ lottery during stock time.

In the stock time (low-probability mode), when the symbol combination corresponding to the weak cherry is stopped and displayed in the symbol display window 113, the CZ lottery is won with a probability of 10% (the CZ is obtained), and the symbol corresponding to the watermelon is selected. When the pattern combination is stop-displayed in the pattern display window 113, the CZ lottery is won with a probability of 5% (CZ is obtained), and the pattern combination corresponding to the chance is stop-displayed in the pattern display window 113. Then, the player wins the CZ lottery with a probability of 12% (obtains CZ), and when the pattern combination corresponding to the strong cherry is stopped and displayed in the pattern display window 113, he wins the CZ lottery with a probability of 30% ( CZ). In this example, even in the same low-probability mode, the stock time (low-probability mode) is easier to win the CZ lottery than the normal stage (low-probability mode) (CZ is easier to obtain).

In addition, in the stock time (high probability mode), when the symbol combination corresponding to the weak cherry is stopped and displayed in the symbol display window 113, the CZ lottery is won with a probability of 15% (the CZ is acquired), and the watermelon is selected. When the corresponding pattern combination is stop-displayed in the pattern display window 113, the CZ lottery is won with a probability of 11% (the CZ is acquired), and the pattern combination corresponding to the chance is stop-displayed in the pattern display window 113. , the CZ lottery is won with a probability of 40% (the CZ is acquired), and when the symbol combination corresponding to the strong cherry is stopped and displayed in the symbol display window 113, the CZ lottery is won with a probability of 100%. (acquire CZ). In this example, even in the same high-probability mode, the stock time (high-probability mode) is easier to win the CZ lottery than the normal stage (high-probability mode) (CZ is easier to obtain).

According to this example, it is possible to make the player feel anticipation for the advantageous section (high-probability mode) during the stock time (first period), and to increase the player's desire to play during the stock time (first period). can be done.

<Example of transition of production state in advantageous section>
Next, with reference to FIG. 21(a), an example of transition of the effect state in the advantageous section will be described. FIG. 21(a) is a diagram showing an example of transition of the effect state in the advantageous section.

As described with reference to FIG. 20, in the special stage of the low navigation state (normal section), when winning a winning combination other than losing, the game shifts to the stock time of the high navigation state (advantageous section).

The transition condition to stock time is not limited to this example. For example, when the conditions for transition from low navigation state (normal section) to high navigation state (advantageous section) are met, the transition to stock time is guaranteed. Alternatively, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to shift to the stock time, or it may be configured not to shift to the stock time after clearing the RAM such as setting changes. , and may be configured to shift to stock time only after the start of an advantageous section after AT or a bonus.

In the stock time, as shown in (a) (1) and (2) of FIG. 21, even if the CZ lottery is won, the state does not shift to the CZ state until the specified number of games in the stock time (50 games) has passed. CZ is stocked (accumulated), the precursor effect is executed for a certain period (in this example, a period of 5 games) from the game in which the CZ lottery is won, and in the final game of the certain period, the CZ lottery is won. Make a CZ winning announcement suggesting that.

In this example, even if you win the CZ lottery during the stock time, the state does not shift to the CZ state until the specified number of games in the stock time (50 games) has passed. The period (the number of games) from the state to the transition to the CZ state is different.

On the other hand, in the normal stage, as shown in FIG. 21 (a) (1), when the CZ lottery is won, the precursor effect is performed for a certain period (in this example, a period of 5 games) from the game in which the CZ lottery was won. is executed, and in the final game of a certain period, after the CZ winning notice suggesting the winning of the CZ lottery is made, the state immediately shifts to the CZ state (weak CZ state) from the next game of the premonition performance. Therefore, in the normal stage, the period (the number of games) from winning the CZ lottery to transitioning to the CZ state is the same regardless of the timing of winning the CZ lottery.

In stock time, when the stock time regulation number of games (50 games) has passed, if the CZ is not stocked, it will shift to the normal stage, and if the CZ is stocked, out of the CZ state, It shifts to one of the weak CZ state, strong CZ state, and AT determined CZ state.

In this example, if one CZ is stocked as shown in FIG. For example, as shown in FIG. It shifts to the AT confirmed CZ state. That is, when a plurality of CZs are stocked during the stock time, the state shifts to a strong CZ state or an AT determined CZ state that is more advantageous to the player than a weak CZ state.

According to this example, a new game feature is provided, such as how many times the CZ lottery is won (how many times a certain condition is satisfied) before the number of games specified in the stock time (first period) ends. It is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, even after winning the CZ lottery (after a certain condition is established), the sense of expectation can be maintained without impairing the playability. In addition, it is possible to suppress the gambling nature from becoming too high, and by winning the CZ lottery twice or more during the number of games specified in the stock time (first period) (a certain condition is established for the second number ), it is possible to transition to a strong CZ state (fourth game state) or an AT confirmed CZ state (fourth game state) that is more advantageous than a weak CZ state (third game state), so the player You can also moderately inflame the expectations of

Also, when the AT lottery is won in the CZ state shifted from the stock time, or when the stock time shifts to the AT fixed CZ, the AT game is shifted after the CZ state ends.

In addition, if you stock three or more CZs in stock time (if AT game is confirmed), even if the number of games specified in stock time (50 games) has not passed, it will immediately shift to AT confirmed CZ state. can be configured to Also, during stock time, in addition to the CZ lottery, an AT lottery (a lottery with a lower winning probability than the CZ lottery) will be held, and if you win the AT lottery, even if the number of games specified in the stock time (50 games) has not passed. , may be configured to immediately shift to the AT state.

In addition, in the final game of stock time, regardless of the presence or absence of CZ stock, a judgment effect may be executed to determine whether or not to transition to the CZ state, and during stock time, the right to transition to the AT state (AT) may perform an obtainable AT lottery and stock AT instead of (or in addition to) CZ. In this case, depending on the stock number of AT (and/or CZ), transition after stock time You may decide the production state to do.

<Production example in stock time>
Next, with reference to FIG. 22, an example of an effect during stock time will be described. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in stock time in chronological order.

In the state shown in FIG. 22(a), the number of remaining games in the stock time (low probability mode) is 48 games.

In this state, a stock time background image (in this example, an image of the night sky including the moon) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 to indicate that the production state is the stock time, and the stock time (low probability mode), the number of remaining games (48G in this example) is displayed.

The state shown in FIG. 22(b) is a state in which the number of remaining games in the stock time (low-probability mode) is 47, and the CZ lottery is won.

In the same state, the background image for stock time (image of the night sky including the moon) and the number of remaining games (in this example, 47G) continue to be displayed. It has started to direct the omens to suggest.

The form of the sign effect is not particularly limited, but in this example, the confrontation effect showing how the main character confronts the enemy samurai is displayed for a certain period of time (in this example, five games) from the game that won the CZ lottery. period).

Specifically, in the premonitory effect of the first game shown in FIG. 22(b), a character string of "Showdown!" In the precursor effect of the second game, the character image of the lord and the character string "It's a game!" are displayed, and in the subsequent precursor effect of the third game shown in FIG. Then, in the 4th game shown in (e) of the same figure, a confrontation scene between the lord and the enemy is displayed, and in the 5th game shown in (f) of the same figure, the lord wins over the enemy. A victory scene and a CZ winning notification (in this example, an image including a character string "CZ won!") for notifying that the player has won the CZ lottery are displayed.

In this example, when the CZ lottery is won, an example is shown in which the predictive effect is performed and the CZ winning notification is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. There may be cases, and it may be determined by lottery whether or not to perform CZ winning notification. In addition, there may be a case where the portent effect is not performed. Moreover, at least a part of the effect (for example, the background image for stock time) before the CZ winning notification is performed and the effect after the CZ winning notification may be different.

The state shown in FIG. 22G is a state in which the number of remaining games in the stock time (low probability mode) is 46 games.

In the same state, the background image for stock time (image of the night sky including the moon) and the number of remaining games (46G in this example) continue to be displayed. , CZ stock icon SI indicating that CZ is stocked.

In this example, the number of remaining games in the stock time is not subtracted during the predictive effect, but the number of remaining games may be subtracted even during the predictive effect. Further, even when the CZ lottery is won, the CZ stock icon SI may be configured not to be displayed, and in this case, the portent effect may be configured not to be executed.

The state shown in FIG. 22(h) is the final game state of the stock time (low probability mode), and the subsequent state shown in FIG. 22(i) is the transition from the stock time (low probability mode) to the CZ state. is.

In this example, since one CZ was stocked during the stock time (low probability mode), after transitioning to the weak CZ state, in the weak CZ state, the CZ transition notification ( In this example, an image including a display of a character string “Enter CZ!”) is displayed, and a weak CZ background image (in this example, an image of the sea and sandy beach) that suggests that the production state is in a weak CZ state is displayed. ) is displayed.

Also, in this example, an example of the production in the stock time (low probability mode) is shown, but in the stock time (high probability mode), for example, the production shown in FIG. 22(j) is performed.

In the stock time (high probability mode) presentation, the background image for stock time (image of the night sky including the moon) and the number of remaining games (48 G in this example) are displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. In addition, on both sides of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, a high-probability mode background image HD (in this example, a plurality of character strings of striped image).

The high-probability mode background image HD is preferably displayed at a position that does not overlap both ends of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 (a position at a predetermined distance from both ends). Then, the display of 48G) is preferably displayed in an overlapping manner in front of the high-probability mode background image HD.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player feel special about the high-probability mode, and to increase the expectation of the player during the stock time (first period). In addition to being able to make the high-probability mode background image HD stand out, the high-probability mode background image HD does not hinder visibility of other images (display of the number of remaining games, etc.).

<Production example on a normal stage>
Next, with reference to FIG. 23, an example of an effect in a normal stage will be described. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of production in a normal stage in chronological order.

The state shown in FIG. 23(a) is the state of the normal stage (low probability mode). In the same state, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 displays a normal stage background image (in this example, an image of the inside of a castle) that suggests that the production state is the normal stage.

The state shown in FIG. 23(b) is the normal stage (low-probability mode) state, in which the CZ lottery is won.

In this state, the normal stage background image (image of the castle interior) continues to be displayed, and since the player has won the CZ lottery, an omen effect indicating that the player has won the CZ lottery is started.

The aspect of the foreshadowing production is not particularly limited, but in this example, similar to the stock time, a confrontation production showing how the main character confronts an enemy samurai is displayed for a certain period of time from the game winning the CZ lottery (this In the example, it is executed for a period of 5 games).

Specifically, in the premonitory effect of the first game shown in FIG. 23(b), a character string of "Showdown!" In the precursor effect of the second game, the character image of the lord and the character string "It's a game!" are displayed, and in the subsequent precursor effect of the third game shown in FIG. Then, in the 4th game shown in (e) of the same figure, a confrontation scene between the lord and the enemy is displayed, and in the 5th game shown in (f) of the same figure, the lord wins over the enemy. A victory scene and a CZ winning notification (in this example, an image including a character string "CZ won!") for notifying that the player has won the CZ lottery are displayed.

In addition, when two CZs are stocked in the stock time, it is configured to move to a strong CZ state, but even in the normal stage, a CZ lottery is performed in the premonition effect after winning the CZ, and the CZ lottery is won. In such a case, it may be configured to shift to the strong CZ state, as in the case where two CZs are stocked.

The state shown in FIG. 23(g) is a state in which the normal stage (low-probability mode) has transitioned to the CZ state.

In this example, since the CZ lottery was won in the normal stage (low-probability mode), the CZ state (weak CZ state) is immediately entered from the next game of the omen effect, and then, in the weak CZ state, the CZ state is entered. Display a CZ transition notification (in this example, an image including a display of a character string “CZ rush!”) indicating that the production state is a weak CZ state. In the example, an image of the sea and sandy beach) is displayed.

Also, in this example, an example of the effect in the normal stage (low probability mode) is shown, but in the normal stage (high probability mode), for example, the effect shown in FIG. 23(h) is performed.

In the production of the normal stage (high probability mode), in addition to displaying the background image for the normal stage (image of the castle) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, on both sides of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, A high-probability mode background image HD (in this example, a belt-shaped image with a plurality of "high-probability" character strings) indicating that the CZ lottery is in the high-probability mode is displayed.

The high-probability mode background image HD is preferably displayed at a position (at a predetermined distance from both ends) that does not overlap both ends of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 .

In this example, the background image for the normal stage (the image inside the castle) and the background image for the stock time (the image of the night sky including the moon) are different images, but they may be the same image. The same image may be used only for the high-probability mode of the stage and stock time, and different images may be used for the low-probability mode of the normal stage and stock time, or vice versa.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) includes control means (for example, the A main control unit 300 and a first sub-control unit 400 shown), wherein the plurality of game states include a first game state (for example, a normal stage shown in FIG. 20) A second game state (for example, CZ state and AT state shown in FIG. 20) that is more advantageous to the player than the game state of is included, and the control means, in the state in which the first game state is set It is possible to set the second game state based on the establishment of a certain condition (for example, winning the CZ lottery), and the control means controls the first period (for example, FIG. 21 (a), the stock time of 50 games), even if the certain condition is satisfied, the second game state is not set during the first period, and the first game state is set. The game machine is characterized in that the second game state is set after the end of the period.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, even if a certain condition is satisfied, the second game state is not entered until the first period ends. It can be enjoyed and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, operating means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1) are provided, and the plurality of game states include a normal state (for example, a normal section shown in FIG. 20), the first game state and the An advantageous state including a second game state (for example, the advantageous section shown in FIG. 20) is included, and is configured to be able to notify operation information (for example, operation navigation) of the operation means, and the advantageous state is the operation information may be in a more advantageous state than the normal state with respect to the notification of, and when the normal state transitions to the advantageous state, the transition to the first period may occur.

With such a configuration, when the state is shifted to the advantageous state, the period shifts to the first period, so the expectation from the previous advantageous state can be maintained, and when the state is shifted from the normal state to the advantageous state. , it is possible to avoid a situation in which too many balls come out in a short time and the gambling property becomes higher than necessary.

Also, the first period may be a period in which the certain condition is more likely to be satisfied than in the second period (certain period other than the first period).

With such a configuration, the first period can be made to feel special compared to the second period, and the player's sense of expectation in the first period can be heightened.

In addition, the first period may include a normal period (e.g., low probability mode) and an advantageous period (e.g., high probability mode) in which the certain condition is more likely to be satisfied than the normal period. .

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player feel anticipation for the advantageous period (high-probability mode) in the first period, and to increase the player's willingness to play in the first period. In a certain period (second period) excluding the first period, the normal period (for example, a period in which the probability of winning the CZ lottery or AT lottery is relatively low) and the certain period than the normal period An advantageous period (for example, a period in which the probability of winning the CZ lottery or the AT lottery is relatively high) in which conditions are likely to be satisfied may be included.

Also, the effects executed during the normal period and the effects executed during the advantageous period differ in at least a part of the effects mode (for example, in the high probability mode, the high probability mode background shown in FIG. 22(j) It may be an image HD (displaying a belt-shaped image with a plurality of character strings of "High Accuracy").

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the advantageous section (high-probability mode) feel special, and to increase the player's expectation in the first period.

Moreover, even if the certain condition is satisfied during the first period, the certain condition may be satisfied during the period of the first period after the certain condition is satisfied. may

With such a configuration, even if a certain condition is met, the transition to the second game state does not occur until the first period ends, so if the certain condition is met early in the first period Even so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost, and to maintain the player's desire to play.

In addition, the second game state includes a third game state (for example, weak CZ state) and a fourth game state (for example, strong CZ state, AT fixed CZ state) that is more advantageous than the third game state. state) is included, and if the number of times the certain condition is satisfied in the first period is the first number (for example, once), the third game state is changed after the end of the first period set, and if the number of times the certain condition is established in the first period is a second number (for example, two times or more), the fourth game state is set after the end of the first period can be anything.

With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a new game feature of how many times a certain condition is satisfied before the first period ends, and to improve the interest of the game. Moreover, even after a certain condition is satisfied, the sense of anticipation can be maintained without impairing the gameplay. In addition, it is possible to suppress the gambling property from becoming too high, and by establishing a second number of certain conditions during the first period, the game state shifts to a fourth game state that is more advantageous than the third game state. Therefore, it is possible to moderately arouse the player's expectations.

<<Embodiment 2>>
A gaming table (slot machine) according to Embodiment 2 of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

<Overall composition>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 24 corresponds to an example of the game table of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. . Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface are housed in the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and rotate inside the slot machine 100. configured to allow These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, an appropriate number of each pattern is printed on a belt-shaped member at equal intervals, and this belt-shaped member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form each of the reels 110 to 112 (see FIG. 27). ). As for the symbols on the reels 110 to 112, the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed approximately three in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113 provided in front of each of the reels 110 to 112, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. there is

By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of multiple types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the central part of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . The backlight is desirably shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (also referred to as an index sensor; not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion is provided in the vicinity of each of the reels 110 to 112. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel is configured to pass between the light part and the light-receiving part. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotation direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbols are displayed on the winning line.

The notification lamp 123 indicates, for example, that a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination 1 or a special combination 2) has been internally elected in an internal lottery to be described later, or during a bonus game (special combination 1 and 2 games It is a lamp that informs the player that the state is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins the replay which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, one card is inserted up to a maximum of three cards, two cards are inserted when the bet button 131 is depressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is depressed. It has become so. The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the specified number of medals is inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The effect button 156 is an operating means that can be operated by the player. In this embodiment, the button is configured by a button that can be pressed by the player, and is used for various effects. The operating means used for such effects are not limited to buttons, and may be configured with, for example, a lever, a touch panel, or the like, or a plurality of operating means may be provided.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The number-of-payouts display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination, and is also used as an instruction monitor for performing a pushing-order effect. In this example, the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are 7-segment (SEG) displays.

A start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110 to 112 . That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139 . The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with the reels 110 to 112, respectively. A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

Hereinafter, operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 are referred to as stop operations, the first stop operation is the first stop operation (hereinafter also referred to as "first stop" or "first stop"), and the next stop operation is the second stop. The operation (hereinafter also referred to as "second stop" or "second stop"), and the final stop operation is referred to as the third stop operation (hereinafter also referred to as "third stop" or "third stop").

Also, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations are referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel, respectively. Further, the order of stopping operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 in order to stop all of the rotating reels 110 to 112 is called an operation order (or push order).

The order of operation (push order) of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is as follows: left stop button 137 is indicated by "left or R", middle stop button 138 by "middle or C", and right stop button 139 by "right or R". , (1) left->middle->right operation order (left-center-right or LCR), (2) left->right->center operation order (left-right-center or LRC), (3) center->left->right operation order ( (Central Right Left or CLR), (4) Middle→Right→Left Operation Order (Center Right Left or CRL), (5) Right→Left→Center Operation Order (Right Left Center or RLC), (6) Right→Center→Left There are six types of operation order (right-center-left or RCL).

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and medals placed on the slot machine 100 and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 . The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 . The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A production device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the production device 160.例文帳に追加

The effect device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (effect image display device), and when the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b open horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 appears in front of the slot machine 100 (player side). It has become.

It should be noted that any display device other than the liquid crystal display device may be used as long as it is capable of displaying various effect images and various game information. , a reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. Also, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the entirety of the screen is configured to be visible to the player. Although the display screen is rectangular in this embodiment, it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

Further, inside the main body 101, there are a setting key that can be switched on and off by a rotating operation, and an operation for changing settings (setting value changing operation) and an operation for checking settings by pressing. A setting switch is provided to enable The setting key is an operation means for starting to change or check setting values (settings 1 to 6 in this example), and the setting switch can set one of a plurality of setting values. It is one of the effective setting means.

<Winning line>
Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the winning lines will be explained. FIG. 25 is a diagram showing an example of winning lines of the slot machine 100. As shown in FIG.

As described with reference to FIG. 24, the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are vertically displayed three times from the symbol display window 113 provided in front of each of the reels 110 to 112 when viewed from the player. A total of nine patterns are visible.

Specifically, the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 1) is the left reel upper stage symbol, and the middle stage of the left reel 110 (position 2 shown in the figure; symbol position 2) is referred to as the left reel middle symbol, and the symbol displayed at the lower stage of the left reel 110 (position 3 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 3) is referred to as the left reel lower stage symbol.

In addition, the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the middle reel 111 (position 4 shown in the figure; also called symbol position 4) is the upper stage symbol of the middle reel, and the middle stage of the middle reel 111 (position 5 shown in the figure; also called symbol position 5). ) is referred to as the middle reel middle symbol, and the symbol displayed at the lower stage of the middle reel 111 (position 6 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 6) is referred to as the middle reel lower stage symbol.

In addition, the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the right reel 112 (position 7 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 7) is the upper symbol of the right reel, and the middle stage of the right reel 112 (position 8 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 8). ) is referred to as the right reel middle symbol, and the symbol displayed at the lower stage of the right reel 112 (the position of 9 shown in the figure; also called symbol position 9) is referred to as the right reel lower stage symbol.

In this embodiment, as the winning line, a middle winning line L1 (hereinafter simply referred to as It may be called a “winning line L1”.) is provided.

Here, the winning line is a line set at a symbol stop position that can be visually recognized through the symbol display window 113, and a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination, which will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29, is displayed. It is a line for which it is determined whether or not the lines are aligned (whether or not they are aligned). A valid winning line (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “valid line”) is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as game media.

The slot machine 100 of this embodiment is a special machine for betting 3 medals. When the number of inserted medals is less than 3, none of the winning lines are activated, and when 3 medals are betted, the winning line L1 is enabled. When the winning line becomes valid, the game can be started by operating the start lever 135 .

In the symbol display window 113, the symbol positions 2, 5 and 8 on the winning line L1 are hereinafter referred to as "winning positions", and the other symbol positions, that is, symbol positions 1, 3, 4, 6, 7 and 9 are "non-winning positions" It may be called "winning position". That is, the winning position is a position on the winning line at which the symbols constituting the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination stop.

Note that the number of winning lines is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the winning line L1, an upper winning line consisting of left reel upper symbols, middle reel upper symbols and right reel upper symbols, and left reel lower symbols, middle reel lower symbols and right reel lower symbols. A total of three lines of the lower pay lines may be set as valid pay lines, or the number of pay lines corresponding to the number of bets on medals may be set as valid pay lines.

<Control part>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control section.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of a game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. and a second sub-controller 500 that controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-controller 400 .

<Main control unit>
First, the main controller 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. This basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, and stopping of the reels. A ROM 306 for storing positions and the like, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. , WDT (watch dog timer) 314 are mounted. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500, which will be described later.

The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 calculates an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division. It determines and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, when the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256×47÷8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 (this circuit contains two random number generation circuits) that derives a numerical value within the range of 0 to 65535 each time it receives the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315a. and a start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338, the CPU 304 Game control is started (main control unit main processing, which will be described later, is started).

A random number generation circuit 316 generates random numbers used in the basic circuit 302 . Random number generation in the random number generation circuit 316 can be broadly divided into two methods: a counter mode and a random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that counts up (down) at predetermined time intervals is obtained and derived as a random number. There are two more methods in random mode. A first method in the random number mode uses a random number seed to perform an operation with a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function), and derives the operation result as a random number. The second method is to read numerical values from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and derive the read numerical values as random numbers. The random value generation circuit 316 uses white noise superimposed on the signals input from the various sensors 318 to the sensor circuit 320 to obtain irregular values. The random value generation circuit 316 uses the value obtained in this way as the initial value of the counter that counts up (down) in the counter mode, as the seed of the random value, or when determining the reading start position of the random number table. use.

In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) at each interrupt time. Medal reception sensor for medals, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, checkout button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from medal payout device 180, optical type of reel 110 sensor, optical sensor of reel 111, optical sensor of reel 112, etc.).

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random value generation circuit 316 . The random number generation circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect the presence or absence of passage of medals. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect the start operation by the player. A stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, and a stop button 139 are installed on each of the stop buttons 137 to 139 to detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

A bet button 130 sensor, a bet button 131 sensor, and a bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into a game. Detects a put operation when The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134 . When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180 . Each sensor described above may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The optical sensor of the reel 110, the optical sensor of the reel 111, and the optical sensor of the reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounts of the reels 110 to 112, and the light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through. It becomes L level every time. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motors provided in the reel devices 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 for driving the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 for selecting the inserted medals, and a drive circuit 324 for driving the solenoid provided in the medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 for driving a motor, various lamps 336 (a winning line display lamp 120, a notification lamp 123, a game medal insertion possible lamp 124, a re-game lamp 122, a game medal insertion lamp 129, a game start lamp 121, a stored number display A driving circuit 328 for driving the device 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127) is provided.

An information output circuit 334 (external collective terminal board 248) is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 334. The game information (for example, game state) of the slot machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 652 provided.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power management unit (not shown) to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 330 monitors the voltage of the power supply. If the value is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), it outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped.

The main control section 300 also has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400 and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400 . Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. However, the first sub-controller 400 is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main controller 300 .

<Sub-controller>
Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-controller 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives control commands transmitted by the main controller 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-controller 400 based on the control commands. This basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. Installed. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores control programs and data for controlling the first sub-controller 400 as a whole, lighting patterns of the backlight, data for controlling various displays, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and speakers 272 and 277 are provided in the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 according to commands from the CPU 404 . An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing sound data is connected to the sound source IC 418 , and the sound data obtained from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277 .

A drive circuit 422 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, etc.) are connected to the drive circuit 422 via an input/output interface. It is connected.

Further, the first sub control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is provided with the shutter 163 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 according to a command from the CPU 404 .

In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sensor circuit 426. The sensor circuit 426 includes a shutter sensor 428 capable of detecting the position of the shutter 163 via an input interface, and a pressing operation of the production button 156. is connected to the effect button sensor 430 capable of detecting the . The CPU 404 monitors the states of the shutter sensor 428 and effect button sensor 430 for each interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-controller 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control section 500 performs various controls of the effect device 160 including display control of the effect image display device 157 (hereinafter also referred to as “liquid crystal display device 157”). The second sub control unit 500 includes, for example, a control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 157, a control unit that controls various performance drive devices (for example, a control unit that controls motor drive of the shutter 163). It may be configured with a plurality of control units such as .

The second sub-controller 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives control commands transmitted by the first sub-controller 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-controller 500 based on the control commands. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. 512 and are installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control section 500, data for image display, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A VDP 516 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504 , generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518 , and displays the image on the effect image display device 157 .

<Pattern arrangement>
Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the pattern arrangement applied to each of the reels 110 to 112 described above will be described. Note that FIG. 27 is a plan view showing the arrangement of symbols applied to each reel (the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112).

On each of the reels 110 to 112, a predetermined number of symbols (in this embodiment, 20 frames numbered 0 to 19) of a plurality of types (9 types in this embodiment) shown on the right side of the figure are arranged. . Numbers 0 to 19 shown at the left end of the figure indicate the arrangement positions of symbols on the respective reels 110 to 112 . For example, in this embodiment, the frame numbered 0 on the left reel 110 has a "watermelon pattern", the frame numbered 1 on the middle reel 111 has a "bell pattern", and the frame numbered 0 on the right reel 112 has a "replay pattern". ” are placed respectively.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described. FIG. 28 is a diagram showing types of winning combinations, names of conditional devices, symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, number of payouts, and remarks.

Winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include a special combination (special combination 1, special combination 2), a general combination (replay combination 1 to 3, small combination 1 to small combination 5), and the like. It should be noted that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations and can be arbitrarily adopted, and some of the winning combinations are omitted in FIG.

<Types of Winning Roles/Special Roles>
Of the winning combinations in this embodiment, the special combination 1 and the special combination 2 are combinations that shift to a special game state in which a predetermined profit is given to the player. Further, the replay combination is a combination that can be replayed without inserting new medals (a combination to which a replay is awarded). These winning hands are sometimes referred to as "working hands".

In addition, "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where a symbol combination of an operating combination that does not involve a payout of medals (does not involve a payout of medals) is displayed on the winning line. Winning a special role 2 and a replay role are included.

Special role 1 and special role 2 are winning combinations in which the game state shifts to special role 1/2 internal winning state (RT3) due to internal winning, and the game state shifts to special role 1/2 game state (RT4) due to winning. is. In addition, when the number of medals exceeding the specified number (for example, 200) is paid out in the special combination 1/2 game state (RT4), the game state shifts to the replay low probability state (RT1). Each game state (RT1 to RT4) will be described later.

The symbol combination corresponding to special role 1 (BB) is "Seven 1 pattern - Seven 1 pattern - Seven 1 pattern" or "Seven 2 pattern - Seven 2 pattern - Seven 2 pattern", and for special role 2 (RB) The corresponding symbol combination is "BAR symbol--BAR symbol--BAR symbol".

When the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is internally won, the special combination internal winning flag corresponding to this internally won combination is set to ON (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). This flag is kept ON until the internal winning combination is won, and the state in which the internally winning combination is likely to be won in the next and subsequent games. That is, in the game in which the special role 1 or the special role 2 is internally won, even if the special role is not won, the special role is internally won in the game after the next time, and the symbol combination corresponding to the special role is It will be easy to win all together.

<Types of Winning Roles/Replay Roles>
The re-playing hands 1 to 3 are prize-winning hands (operating hands) that can be played without inserting medals (game media) in the next game due to winning, and medals are not paid out. The corresponding symbol combinations are as shown in FIG. The replay combination may be any combination that allows the player to play the next game without inserting medals. Therefore, for example, when the replay role is won, the medals may be automatically inserted in the next game (the number of inserted medals is reset in the inserted medal number storage area), or the replay role may be won. The medals inserted in the played game may be carried over to the next game and used as they are.

<Types of Winning Roles/Small Roles>
Small winning combination 1 to small winning combination 5 are winning combinations in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out (there is a payout number).

A small winning combination 1 (watermelon) is a winning combination in which a symbol combination of "watermelon symbol-watermelon symbol-watermelon symbol" is stop-displayed on the winning line L1 and 5 medals are paid out.

The small combination 2 (cherry) is a winning combination in which the symbol combination of "cherry symbol-ANY-ANY" is stop-displayed on the winning line L1 and two medals are paid out. The symbol combination of "cherry symbol-ANY-ANY" indicates that the symbol on the left reel 110 may be "cherry symbol", and the symbols on the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112 may be any symbols. .

Hereinafter, these small wins 1 (watermelon) and small wins 2 (cherry) may be collectively referred to as “rare wins”, but the rare wins are not limited to these winning wins. Either one of the winning combinations may be used, or another winning combination may be added.

If a rare combination is won in the AT state, which will be described later, a lottery for increasing the number of games or increasing the number of sets is executed (making it easier to win the lottery). On the other hand, even if a rare combination is won in the ED state, a lottery for increasing the number of games or increasing the number of sets is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 29, the small winning combination 3 (push-order bell) is composed of six types of winning combinations of small winning combination 3a to small winning combination 3f. In this example, by lottery, with a predetermined probability (in this example, about 1/6; common to all settings), one of the small wins 3a to 3f is internally won, and stopped by the stop buttons 137 to 139. When the operation order (pressing order) of the operations matches the correct pressing order corresponding to the internally won winning combination, a prize is won and 12 medals are paid out (details will be described later with reference to FIG. 29).

In the small combination 4 (common bell), regardless of the operation order (push order) or operation timing of the stop operation by the stop buttons 137 to 139, the symbol combination of "bell pattern - bell pattern - bell pattern" is on the winning line L1. This is a winning combination that is stopped and 12 medals are paid out.

In the small win 5 (one win), regardless of the operation order (pushing order) or operation timing of the stop operation by the stop buttons 137 to 139, the symbol combination of "replay symbol-replay symbol-blank 1 symbol" is the winning line L1. This is a winning combination that is stopped and displayed at the top and that one medal is paid out.

<Small role 3 (push order bell) and AT game>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 29(a) and 29(b), the relationship between the small win 3 (push-order bell) and the AT game will be described.

FIG. 29(a) is a diagram showing the symbol combinations, payout numbers, and remarks corresponding to the small winning combination 3 (push-order bell) and the small winning combination 5 (one-piece winning combination), and FIG. It is a diagram showing the relationship between the pressing order of the stop buttons 137 to 139 in the game in which the combination 3 (pressing order bell) is internally won and the AT game.

The small winning combination 3 (push order bell) includes a small combination 3a (push order bell LCR), a small combination 3b (push order bell RLC), a small combination 3c (push order bell CRL), a small combination 3d (push order bell LRC), It consists of 6 types of winning combinations, ie, a small combination 3e (push-order bell CLR) and a small combination 3f (push-order bell RCL).

When a small win 3 (push order bell) is internally won, it is determined which symbol combination is stop-displayed on the pay line L1 according to the operation order of the stop operation by the stop buttons 137 to 139, and AT. It is determined whether the game is favorable or unfavorable.

Although the details will be described later, in this example, among the six types of pressing order bells of the small winning combination 3a to the small winning combination 3f, the small winning combination 3b (pushing order bell RLC), the small winning combination 3c (pushing order bell CRL), and the small winning combination 3e (Push order bell CLR), 4 types of small combination 3f (push order bell RCL), 12 medals are paid out when the stop operation is performed according to the irregular push that is the correct operation order. Therefore, when the minor win 3 (push order bell) is internally won, if the stop operation is performed according to the irregular push, the small win (push order bell) is won with a probability of 4/6, and stopped according to the irregular push. The game in which the operation is performed is a "high base game" in which the number of medals obtained is relatively large.

On the other hand, in the present example, among the six kinds of pressing order bells of the small winning combination 3a to the small winning combination 3f, the small winning combination 3a (pressing order bell LCR) is stopped according to the correct operation order, which is the forward pressing. 12 medals are paid out, and 12 medals are paid out when the minor winning combination 3d (push order bell LRC) is stopped according to the correct operation order of hitting scissors. Therefore, when the small win 3 (push order bell) is internally won, if the stop operation is performed according to the forward push or the scissors strike, the small win (push order bell) will be won with a probability of 2/6. A game in which a stop operation is performed according to pushing or hitting with scissors is a "low-base game" in which the number of medals obtained is relatively small.

The six types of small winning combination 3a to small winning combination 3f will be specifically described below.

<Small role 3a (pushing order bell LCR)>
When the small win 3a (push order bell LCR) is internally won among the small wins 3 (push order bell), and the stop operation is performed according to the predetermined correct operation order (in this example, the order push (LCR)) , the symbol combination of "bell symbol - bell symbol - bell symbol" is stop-displayed, 12 medals are paid out, and the AT game is advantageous.

On the other hand, a small winning combination 3a (push order bell LCR) is internally elected, and according to a predetermined incorrect operation order (in this example, scissors hitting (LRC)) among a plurality of incorrect operation orders other than the correct operation order. When a stop operation is performed, symbol combinations other than "bell pattern-bell pattern-bell pattern" are stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game is advantageous.

In addition, a small combination 3a (push order bell LCR) is internally elected, and among a plurality of incorrect operation orders other than the correct operation order, a predetermined incorrect operation order (in this example, irregular pushes (CLR, CRL, When the stop operation is performed according to either RLC or RCL)), a symbol combination other than "bell pattern - bell pattern - bell pattern" is stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game is disadvantageous. becomes.

Here, "AT game becomes disadvantageous" means "to make the ease of acquiring game value in AT game disadvantageous by the player", for example, the stop operation was performed by irregular pressing in the normal game In the game, AT lottery is not executed, or the number of games in one set of AT game is reduced, the number of initial games at the time of AT winning and the probability of addition are disadvantageous depending on the number of irregular pushes, and each game point lottery is performed. When irregular pushing is performed on a game machine that determines AT performance according to the points, the point lottery becomes disadvantageous, and in a game in which a stop operation is performed by irregular pushing in a normal game, the probability of winning the AT lottery is lowered. , To reduce the execution frequency of operation navigation in AT games, not to execute set continuation lottery in AT games, to lower the winning probability of set continuation lottery in AT games, and the like. On the other hand, "AT game becomes advantageous" means "making the ease of acquisition of game value in AT game advantageous for the player".

As described above, in this example, when the small winning combination 3 is internally won, the forward pressing (LCR) or the scissors hitting (LRC) is performed, the AT game becomes advantageous, and when the small winning combination 3 is internally won, the irregular pressing (Any one of CLR, CRL, RLC, and RCL) was designed to make the AT game disadvantageous, but the present invention is not limited to this. LCR) or scissors striking (LRC) does not change the advantage of the AT game, and if you perform an irregular push (either CLR, CRL, RLC, or RCL) when internally elected to the small combination 3, the AT game It may be disadvantageous, and if the forward push (LCR) or scissors strike (LRC) is performed when the small winning combination 3 is internally won, the AT game becomes advantageous, and when the small winning combination 3 is internally won, it is irregular. The advantage of the AT game may not change when the push (either CLR, CRL, RLC, or RCL) is performed.

<Small role 3b (Push order bell RLC)>
When the small win 3b (push order bell RLC) is internally won among the small wins 3 (push order bell), and the stop operation is performed according to the predetermined correct operation order (in this example, irregular push (RLC)) , the symbol combination of "bell symbol-bell symbol-bell symbol" is stop-displayed, 12 medals are paid out, and the AT game becomes disadvantageous.

On the other hand, the small combination 3b (push-order bell RLC) is internally elected, and among a plurality of incorrect-answer operation orders other than the correct operation order, a predetermined incorrect-answer operation order (in this example, forward push (LCR) or scissors When the stop operation is performed according to the strike (LRC), the symbol combinations other than the ``bell pattern-bell pattern-bell pattern'' are stop-displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game is advantageous.

In addition, a small combination 3b (push order bell RLC) is internally elected, and among a plurality of incorrect operation orders other than the correct operation order, a predetermined incorrect operation order (in this example, irregular pushes (CLR, CRL, When a stop operation is performed according to any of RCL)), symbol combinations other than "bell pattern - bell pattern - bell pattern" are stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game becomes disadvantageous. .

<Small role 3c (pushing order bell CRL)>
When the small win 3c (push order bell CRL) is internally won among the small wins 3 (push order bell), and the stop operation is performed according to the predetermined correct operation order (in this example, irregular push (CRL)) , the symbol combination of "bell symbol-bell symbol-bell symbol" is stop-displayed, 12 medals are paid out, and the AT game becomes disadvantageous.

On the other hand, a small combination 3c (push order bell CRL) is internally elected, and among a plurality of incorrect operation orders other than the correct operation order, a predetermined incorrect operation order (in this example, forward push (LCR) or scissors When the stop operation is performed according to the strike (LRC), the symbol combinations other than the ``bell pattern-bell pattern-bell pattern'' are stop-displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game is advantageous.

In addition, a small combination 3c (push order bell CRL) is internally elected, and among a plurality of incorrect operation orders other than the correct operation order, a predetermined incorrect operation order (in this example, irregular pushes (CLR, RLC, When a stop operation is performed according to any of RCL)), symbol combinations other than "bell pattern - bell pattern - bell pattern" are stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game becomes disadvantageous. .

<Small win 3d (pushing order bell LRC)>
When a small win 3d (push order bell LRC) is internally won among the small wins 3 (push order bell), and a stop operation is performed according to a predetermined correct operation order (in this example, scissors strike (LRC)) , the symbol combination of "bell symbol - bell symbol - bell symbol" is stop-displayed, 12 medals are paid out, and the AT game is advantageous.

On the other hand, a small combination 3d (push order bell LRC) is internally elected, and according to a predetermined incorrect operation order (in this example, forward push (LCR)) among a plurality of incorrect operation orders other than the correct operation order. When a stop operation is performed, symbol combinations other than "bell pattern-bell pattern-bell pattern" are stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game is advantageous.

In addition, a small combination 3d (push order bell LRC) is internally elected, and among a plurality of incorrect operation orders other than the correct operation order, a predetermined incorrect operation order (in this example, irregular pushes (CLR, CRL, When the stop operation is performed according to either RLC or RCL)), a symbol combination other than "bell pattern - bell pattern - bell pattern" is stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game is disadvantageous. becomes.

<Small role 3e (pushing order bell CLR)>
When the small win 3e (push order bell CLR) is internally won among the small wins 3 (push order bell), and the stop operation is performed according to the predetermined correct operation order (in this example, irregular push (CLR)) , the symbol combination of "bell symbol-bell symbol-bell symbol" is stop-displayed, 12 medals are paid out, and the AT game becomes disadvantageous.

On the other hand, a small win 3e (push-order bell CLR) is internally won, and among a plurality of incorrect-answer operation orders other than the correct operation order, a predetermined incorrect-answer operation order (in this example, forward push (LCR) or scissors When the stop operation is performed according to the strike (LRC), the symbol combinations other than the ``bell pattern-bell pattern-bell pattern'' are stop-displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game is advantageous.

In addition, a small combination 3e (push order bell CLR) is internally elected, and among a plurality of incorrect operation orders other than the correct operation order, a predetermined incorrect operation order (in this example, irregular pushes (CRL, RLC, When a stop operation is performed according to any of RCL)), symbol combinations other than "bell pattern - bell pattern - bell pattern" are stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game becomes disadvantageous. .

<Small win 3f (push order bell RCL)>
When the minor win 3f (push order bell RCL) is internally won among the small wins 3 (push order bell), and the stop operation is performed according to the predetermined correct operation order (in this example, irregular press (RCL)). , the symbol combination of "bell symbol-bell symbol-bell symbol" is stop-displayed, 12 medals are paid out, and the AT game becomes disadvantageous.

On the other hand, a small combination 3f (push order bell RCL) is internally elected, and among a plurality of incorrect operation orders other than the correct operation order, a predetermined incorrect operation order (in this example, forward push (LCR) or scissors When the stop operation is performed according to the strike (LRC), the symbol combinations other than the ``bell pattern-bell pattern-bell pattern'' are stop-displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game is advantageous.

In addition, a small combination 3f (push order bell RCL) is internally elected, and among a plurality of incorrect operation orders other than the correct operation order, a predetermined incorrect operation order (in this example, irregular pushes (CRL, CLR, When a stop operation is performed according to any of RLC)), symbol combinations other than "bell pattern - bell pattern - bell pattern" are stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game becomes disadvantageous. .

In this example, one medal is paid out in the event that a small winning combination 3a to a small winning combination 3f is internally won and the stop operation is performed in the order of incorrect operation. The number is not limited to 1, and may be 0, or may be 1 or more as long as it is less than 12 paid out when the stop operation is performed in the correct operation order.

<Small role 5 (1 sheet role)>
Next, using FIGS. 29(a) and 29(c), the relationship between the small winning combination 5 (one-piece winning combination) and the setting suggestion effect A will be described.

FIG. 29(a) shows the symbol combinations, payout numbers, and remarks corresponding to the small winning combination 3 (push-order bell) and the small winning combination 5 (one-piece winning combination), and FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the relationship between the pressing order of stop buttons 137 to 139 and the setting suggestion effect A in a game in which a hand 5 (single hand) is internally won.

If you win a small winning combination 5 (one winning combination) internally, regardless of the operation order (pressing order) or operation timing of the stop operation by the stop buttons 137 to 139, you will win a small winning combination 5 (one winning combination). One medal is paid out, but whether or not the setting suggesting effect A can be executed is determined according to the operation order of the stop operation by the stop buttons 137-139.

As a specific example, when a small win 5 (one win) is internally won and a stop operation is performed according to a predetermined operation order (in this example, forward pressing (LCR) or scissors hitting (LRC)). , a small winning combination 5 (one winning combination) is won and one medal is paid out, and the setting suggesting effect A becomes executable.

On the other hand, a small winning combination 5 (1 piece winning combination) is internally won, and a stop operation is performed according to an operation order other than a predetermined operation order (in this example, irregular pressing (either CLR, CRL, RLC, or RCL)). In this case, a small winning combination 5 (one winning combination) is won and one medal is paid out, but the setting suggestion effect A is not executed.

In this example, when the small winning combination 5 (1-piece winning combination) is internally won and the stop operation is performed according to the irregular pressing, the setting suggestion effect A becomes unexecutable. 5 (single role), when the internal winning is won, the operation navigation is displayed, and if the stop operation that does not follow the operation navigation is performed (when the stop operation is performed ignoring the operation navigation), setting suggestion production A may be configured to be in a non-executable state.

Also, in this example, when the small win 5 is internally won and the stop operation is performed by irregular pressing, one medal is paid out, but the number of payouts is not limited to one. 0 may be used.

Here, the setting suggesting effect is a effect suggesting the currently set setting values (in this example, setting 1 to setting 6) by using effect elements in the slot machine 100, and setting suggesting effects to be described later. The effect A and the setting suggesting effect B are one of the setting suggesting effects.

The effect element used for the setting suggestion effect is not particularly limited, but for example, display by display means (for example, liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 24), sound output means (for example, speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 26) Output sound, light output from light output means (for example, backlight of reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 24, lamps such as side lamp 144 shown in FIG. 24), and movable bodies (for example, in FIG. 24 The movement (for example, vibration, rotation, expansion and contraction, vertical movement) of the shutter (shielding device) 163 shown in FIG.

In this example, when the stop operation is performed in an operation order other than the predetermined operation order (in this example, irregular pressing), the setting suggesting effect A cannot be executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The effect A may be executed less frequently.

In addition, although the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect is the same as when the stop operation is performed in accordance with a predetermined operation order (in this example, forward pressing (LCR) or scissors hitting (LRC)), the setting suggestion effect Of these, effects that definitely suggest the setting value (for example, effects that include a display such as “setting 5 confirmed”) are executed less frequently (effects that vaguely suggest the setting value (for example, “setting 5? setting 6 ?”) may be executed more frequently).

In addition, the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect A is lower than when the stop operation is performed in accordance with a predetermined operation order (in this example, forward pressing (LCR) or scissors hitting (LRC)), and The execution frequency of the effect that definitely suggests the setting value may also be reduced.

<Types of RT game states>
Next, the types and transitions of RT-based game states in the slot machine 100 will be described.

<Replay low probability state (RT1)>
The low replay probability state (RT1) is a default RT-based game state (hereinafter also referred to as “normal game state”) that is initially set immediately after the power of the slot machine 100 is turned on. This game state is relatively disadvantageous compared to other game states.

In this example, in this replay low probability state (RT1), when a replay combination 2 (promotion replay 1) or replay combination 3 (promotion replay 2) is won, a replay high probability state (RT2) described later transition to Also, in this replay low probability state (RT1), when the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is internally elected, the state shifts to the special combination 1/2 internal winning state (RT3) to be described later.

<Replay High Probability State (RT2)>
The high replay probability state is a gaming state in which the internal winning probability of replay is higher than that of the low replay probability state (RT1).

In this example, in this replay high probability state (RT2), when the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is internally elected, the state shifts to the special combination 1/2 internal winning state (RT3) to be described later.

<Special roles 1 and 2 internal elected state (RT3)>
Special role 1/2 internal winning state (RT3) is a state in which the internal winning flag corresponding to special role 1 or special role 2 is set to ON, and the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing, This is a game state in which the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination corresponding to this flag can be displayed.

In this example, in this special combination 1/2 internal winning state (RT3), when the special combination 1 or special combination 2 is won, the state shifts to a special game state (RT4) which will be described later.

<Special game state (RT4)>
The special game state (RT4) is the most advantageous game state for the player among all the game states. In this example, in the special game state (RT4), when the specified number (for example, 200) is paid out, the replay low probability state (RT1) is entered.

In this example, the conditions for ending the special game state (RT4) are not particularly limited. It may be the case that the game has been played a number of times (for example, 6 times).

<Transition of game state of AT system>
Next, the game state of the AT system will be explained.

The game state of the AT system is roughly divided into a low navigation state and a high navigation state. A low navigation state is a state in which the probability of operation navigation being executed is low, and is also referred to as a normal mode, a non-advantageous section, or a normal section. The high navigation state is a state in which the probability of operation navigation being executed is higher than in the low navigation state, and is also called AT mode or advantageous section.

Here, operation navigation refers to an effect that notifies the stop operation mode (for example, the correct operation order or the timing of the stop operation) of the stop buttons 137 to 139 in order to obtain medals or maintain an advantageous gaming state. , an effect (for example, an effect of displaying the characters “left→middle→right”) for notifying the correct operation order of a winning combination (for example, a small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell LCR)).

When the stop operation is performed according to the operation content of the operation navigation, a result advantageous to the player is brought about, so the high navigation state is a game state more advantageous to the player than the low navigation state. Here, the term “advantageous” specifically refers to the total number of gaming media paid out by the gaming machine as compared to the total number of gaming media used by the player as the number of bets when playing the game for a predetermined period of time. It means that the ratio, the so-called payout rate (ball output rate) is advantageous.

In this example, the low navigation state is a state in which the execution probability of operation navigation is low, and the high navigation state is a state in which the execution probability of operation navigation is higher than in the low navigation state. The non-execution state and high-navigation state may be set to the state in which operation navigation is executed.

Each game state of the AT system is subdivided and managed, and is called an effect state. Specifically, the production state of the low navigation state is the normal game state, and the production state of the high navigation state is the normal state, the final announcement state, the judge state, the withdrawal state, the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the ED (ending) state. there is Note that the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the ED state are, in principle, states in which the ball output increases.

In this embodiment, when a certain condition is established in the normal game state of the low navigation state (for example, when winning a winning combination other than losing), the game shifts to the normal state of the high navigation state. After that, for example, it moves in the order of fixed announcement state → AT1 state → judge state, and from this judge state, it goes through the withdrawal state to the normal game state or AT2 state, or directly from the judge state, AT2 There is a route to transition to a state, and so on.

AT state (AT1 state, AT2 state) is a state in which a predetermined number of AT games (for example, 30 games in one set) can be played. This is an advantageous state for the player.

In this AT game, a set continuation lottery (for example, a lottery with a winning probability of 1/4) is executed as to whether or not to continue the AT game in the starting game of the AT game, and when this set continuation lottery is won, a predetermined number of times (In this example, 1 set of 30 games) AT games are given, and the AT state is extended. Also, when the condition for shifting to the normal game state is established in the AT state (in this example, when all the games in the AT state are completed), the next game shifts to the normal game state.

Further, when the number of remaining games in the high navigation state becomes equal to or less than a predetermined number of games (for example, 20 games), the state shifts to the ED state, and in this ED state, an ED (ending) effect is executed to suggest the end of the high navigation state. be.

The condition for transitioning to the ED state is not limited to a predetermined number of games (for example, 20 games) remaining in the high navigation state. , "the number of coins to be acquired + the difference in the number of coins to be acquired>2000".

<Setting Suggestion Effect A>
Next, setting suggestion effect A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30(a) is a time chart showing an example of the game periods of the high-probability mode and the low-probability mode of the setting suggestion effect A. FIG.

In this example, in the advantageous section, the internal lottery at the time of pressing the start lever 135 (lever on) internally wins a small winning combination 5 (1 piece winning combination), and a predetermined operation order (in this example, forward pressing (LCR) or striking with scissors (LRC)), when the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated to stop, by executing the setting suggestion effect A lottery using the setting suggestion effect A selection table described later, Setting suggestion effect A becomes executable.

When it is decided to execute the setting suggesting performance A by the setting suggesting performance A lottery, the suggesting performance suggesting that the setting suggesting performance A will be executed is executed in the game in which the lottery is executed.

On the other hand, in the advantageous section, the internal lottery at the time of pressing the start lever 135 (lever on) is internally elected to the small winning combination 5 (1 piece winning combination), and the operation order other than the predetermined operation order (in this example, Irregular press (any of CLR, CRL, RLC, RCL)) When the stop button 137 to 139 is operated to stop, the setting suggestion effect A lottery is not executed, so the setting suggestion effect A or the setting suggestion effect A is not executed. None of the suggestive renditions suggesting that is executed are executed.

It should be noted that, in this example, the stop button 137 is internally elected to the small winning combination 5 (1 piece winning combination), and a predetermined operation order (in this example, forward pressing (LCR) or scissors hitting (LRC)). An example of executing the setting suggestion effect A lottery when the stop operation of to 139 is performed will be shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. In addition, it may be executed when the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated in a predetermined operation order, or a predetermined winning combination (for example, 1 It may be executed when a prize is won, or when a predetermined number of medals are paid out regardless of the stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 (for example, 1 by irregular pressing). It may be executed when there is a payout of medals, etc.).

In addition, when a small winning combination 5 (1 piece winning combination) is internally elected, and a forward press (LCR) or scissors strike (LRC) is stopped, one medal is paid out, a small winning combination 5 is internally won, and an irregular pressing is performed. When the stop operation is performed with , the payout of medals may not be performed, and whether or not to execute the setting suggestion performance A lottery may be determined according to the number of payouts of medals when the small win 5 is internally won.

In other words, the conditions for executing the setting suggestion effect A lottery may be internal winning of a small winning combination of 5 (one winning combination) and payout of one medal.

The setting suggestion performance A lottery in this example has two types, a low probability mode and a high probability mode in which the setting suggestion performance A has a higher execution probability than the low probability mode.

The conditions for starting the low-probability mode and high-probability mode are not particularly limited, but in this example, as shown in FIG. , a high-probability mode for a predetermined number of games (10 games in this example) is set. In this high-probability mode, when a predetermined number of games (10 games in this example) have passed without execution of the setting suggestion effect A, the next game is shifted to the low-probability mode. On the other hand, in the high-probability mode, when the setting suggestion effect A is executed before the predetermined number of games (10 games) has passed (the eighth game in this example), the game in which the setting suggestion effect A is executed Shift to low probability mode from the next game.

Conventionally, when AT state, ED state, etc. are completed, it immediately shifts from high navigation state (advantageous section) to low navigation state (normal section) and then to high navigation state (advantageous section). There are many players who immediately end the game (immediately quit) when transitioning from a low navigation state (normal section) to a high navigation state (advantageous section). Advantageous section), by setting a high-probability mode period with a high probability of execution of setting suggestion production, which is different from the low-probability mode period ), it is possible to make it difficult to end the game immediately (immediately quit), and the operating rate can be improved.

In addition, the conditions for setting the high probability mode are not particularly limited. If not), the high probability mode may be set, if a predetermined winning role is won, the high probability mode may be set, and if the lottery is won, the high probability mode may be set. You may

<Setting Suggestion Effect A Selection Table>
FIG. 30(b) is a diagram showing an example of a setting suggestion effect A selection table used for the setting suggestion effect A lottery.

The setting suggesting effect A lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not the setting suggesting effect A is to be executed, and if it is to be executed, the effect contents of the setting suggesting effect A. In this example, when it is determined by the lottery to execute the setting suggesting effect A, after executing the suggesting effect suggesting that the setting suggesting effect A will be executed in the game in which the lottery is executed, In the next game, the setting suggestion effect A is executed.

Note that the game in which the setting suggestion effect A is executed is not limited to the game following the game in which the setting suggestion effect A lottery is executed. may be a game of Also, the game in which the suggesting effect suggesting that the setting suggesting effect A will be executed is not limited to the game in which the setting suggesting effect A lottery is executed, and may be before the setting suggesting effect A is executed.

Among the "details of effect" in the setting suggestion effect A selection table shown in FIG. The contents of the performance A are shown.

In the setting suggestion effect A, among the plurality of types of effect elements, the display by the display means (in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 24) and the sound output means (in this example, the speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 26) ) to produce an effect using the sound output from.

Note that the effect elements used in the setting suggestion effect A may be of a plurality of types, and may be displayed by display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 24), sound output means (for example, the speaker 272 shown in FIG. 26, 277), light output from light output means (for example, the backlight of the reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 24, lamps such as the side lamp 144 shown in FIG. 24), and movable bodies (for example, Movements of the shutter (shielding device) 163) shown in FIG. 24 (for example, vibration, rotation, expansion and contraction, vertical movement), etc. can be arbitrarily combined.

The effect content "even number suggestion image" is an image suggesting that the setting value may be an even number (in this example, one of setting 2, setting 4, or setting 6) as setting suggestion effect A. This is an effect of displaying on the display device 157 and outputting from the speakers 272 and 277 a voice suggesting that the set value may be an even number.

The effect content "odd number suggestion image" is an image suggesting that the setting value may be an odd number (one of setting 1, setting 3, or setting 5 in this example) as setting suggestion effect A. This is an effect of displaying on the display device 157 and outputting from the speakers 272 and 277 a voice suggesting that the set value may be an odd number.

The effect content "high setting suggesting image" is an image suggesting that the set value may be set to a high setting (setting 5 or setting 6 in this example) as setting suggesting effect A on the liquid crystal display device 157. This is an effect of outputting from the speakers 272 and 277 a voice suggesting that the set value may be set to a high value while displaying the result.

The effect content "even number setting confirmation image" is an image suggesting that the setting value is confirmed to be an even number (in this example, any of setting 2, setting 4, or setting 6) as setting suggestion effect A. is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157, and a voice indicating that the set value is confirmed to be an even number is output from the speakers 272 and 277.

The effect content "4 or more confirmed image" indicates that the setting value is set to 4 or more (in this example, any of setting 4, setting 5, or setting 6) as setting suggestion effect A. The image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157, and a sound is output from the speakers 272 and 277 indicating that the set value is confirmed to be 4 or more.

The effect content "5 or more confirmed image" is an image suggesting that the set value is set at 5 or more (in this example, setting 5 or setting 6) as the setting suggesting effect A, which is displayed on the liquid crystal display. This is an effect of displaying on the device 157 and outputting from the speakers 272 and 277 a voice suggesting that the set value is confirmed to be 5 or more.

The effect content "6 confirmed image" is a setting suggesting effect A in which an image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 to indicate that the set value is set to 6 and that the set value is set to 6. This is an effect in which a sound suggesting that something is confirmed is output from the speakers 272 and 277 .

Note that the content of the setting suggestion effect is not limited to this example, and may include, for example, an effect that vaguely suggests the setting value (for example, a display or sound including “Setting 5? Setting 6?”), a setting value An effect suggesting a range (for example, an effect including a display or sound such as "setting 2 to setting 4") or the like may be used.

<Setting Suggestion Effect A / Low Probability Mode>
In the low-probability mode of the setting suggestion performance A, the lottery data corresponding to the low-probability mode of the setting suggestion performance A selection table is referred to, and whether or not to execute the setting suggestion performance A is executed based on the current set value. If so, the effect content of the setting suggestion effect A is determined.

For example, when the current setting value is setting 1 or setting 3, there is a 100% probability that "no execution" is selected and the setting suggestion effect A is not executed. If the current setting value is setting 2, there is a 99% chance that “no execution” will be selected and the setting suggestion effect A will not be executed, and a 1% probability that the effect content “even number setting confirmed image” will be executed. A setting suggestion effect A is executed.

If the current setting value is setting 4, there is a 98% chance that "no execution" is selected and the setting suggestion effect A is not executed, and a 1% probability is that the effect content "even number setting confirmed image" is selected. The setting suggesting effect A is executed, and the setting suggesting effect A of the effect content "4 or more confirmed image" is executed with a probability of 1%.

If the current set value is set to 5, there is a 98% chance that “no execution” will be selected and the setting suggestion effect A will not be executed, and a 1% chance that the effect content “4 or more confirmed image” will be selected. A setting suggesting effect A is executed, and the setting suggesting effect A of the effect content "5 or more confirmed image" is executed with a probability of 1%.

If the current setting value is setting 6, there is a 96% chance that "no execution" is selected and the setting suggestion effect A is not executed, and a 1% probability is that the effect content "even number setting confirmed image" is selected. Execute the setting suggestion effect A, with a probability of 1%, execute the setting suggestion effect A with the effect content “4 or more confirmed image”, and with a 1% probability, execute the setting suggestion effect A with the effect content “5 or more confirmed image” Execute, and with a probability of 1%, the setting suggestion effect A of the effect content "6 finalized image" is executed.

<Setting Suggestion Effect A / High Probability Mode>
In the high-probability mode of the setting suggestion performance A, lottery data corresponding to the high-probability mode of the setting suggestion performance A selection table are referred to, and the performance contents of the setting suggestion performance A are determined based on the current set values. In the high-probability mode, the probability that "no execution" is selected is 0% in all of the settings 1 to 6, and the setting suggestion effect A is always executed.

When the current set value is set 1, there is a 47% probability that the setting suggestion effect A with the effect content "even number suggestive image" is executed, and with a 47% probability, the setting suggestion effect with the effect content "odd number suggestive image" is executed. The effect A is executed, and the setting suggestive effect A of the effect content "high setting suggestive image" is executed with a probability of 6%.

When the current setting value is setting 2, the setting suggestion effect A of the effect content “even number suggestive image” is executed with a probability of 56%, and the effect content “odd number suggestive image” setting suggestion is executed with a probability of 38%. The performance A is executed, the setting suggestion performance A of the performance content ``high setting suggestion image'' is executed with a probability of 5%, and the setting suggestion performance A of the performance content ``even number setting fixed image'' is executed with a probability of 1%.

When the current setting value is setting 3, the setting suggestion effect A of the effect content “even number suggestive image” is executed with a probability of 37%, and the effect content “odd number suggestive image” setting suggestion is executed with a probability of 55%. The effect A is executed, and the setting suggesting effect A of the effect content "high setting suggesting image" is executed with a probability of 8%.

When the current set value is set 4, the setting suggestion effect A of the effect content "even number suggestive image" is executed with a probability of 54%, and the effect content "odd number suggestive image" is suggested with a probability of 34%. Execution of effect A, 8% probability to execute setting suggestion effect A of effect content ``high setting suggestion image'', 3% probability to execute setting suggestion effect A of effect content ``even number setting confirmed image'', The setting suggestion effect A of the effect content "4 or more confirmed image" is executed with a probability of 1%.

When the current set value is set to 5, the setting suggestion effect A with the effect content "even number suggestive image" is executed with a probability of 31%, and the effect content "odd number suggestive image" with a probability of 58%. Execution of effect A, with a probability of 9% execution of setting suggestion effect A of effect content "high setting suggestive image", execution of setting suggestive effect A of effect content "4 or more confirmed image" with probability of 1%, The setting suggestion effect A of the effect content "5 or more confirmed image" is executed with a probability of 1%.

When the current set value is set to 6, there is a 51% probability that the setting suggestion effect A with the effect content “even number suggestive image” is executed, and with a 29% probability, the setting suggestion effect with the effect content “odd number suggestive image” is executed. Execution of effect A, 10% probability to execute setting suggestion effect A of effect content ``high setting suggestion image'', 5% probability to execute setting suggestion effect A of effect content ``even number setting confirmed image'', 2% probability to execute setting suggestion effect A with effect content “4 or more confirmed image”, 2% probability to execute setting suggestion effect A with effect content “5 or more confirmed image”, 1% probability Execute the setting suggestion effect A of the content "6 finalized image".

As described above, the first feature of the setting suggestion effect A selection table is that in the high-probability mode, compared to the low-probability mode, the effect that vaguely suggests the set value ("even number suggestive image", "odd number suggestive image", " High setting suggestive image”) has a high execution probability. By doing so, even in the high-probability mode, it is possible to prevent the player from easily guessing the set value, and it is possible to encourage the player to play for a long period of time.

Also, in the low-probability mode, the execution probability itself is extremely low, so when it is executed, the production that vaguely suggests the setting value ("even number suggestive image", "odd number suggestive image", "high setting suggestive image") is executed. By making the probability low, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being too difficult to guess.

The second feature of the setting suggestion effect A selection table is that in the low probability mode, setting suggestion effect A is more likely to be executed in settings 4 to 6 than in settings 1 to 3. points. By doing so, when the execution probability itself is extremely low, the effect that gives a good impression is executed (the effect that gives a good impression is executed in the case of setting 4 to setting 6). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and encourage the player to play for a long period of time.

It should be noted that the selection probability shown in the setting suggestion effect A selection table of this example is merely an example, and is not limited to the numerical values of this example. For example, in setting 1 to setting 3 of low probability mode, it was not executed, but it may be executed, and in high probability mode, it was always executed, but it is not executed You can make it happen.

<Setting Suggestion Effect B>
Next, setting suggestion effect B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31(a) is a time chart showing an example of the game periods of the high-probability mode and low-probability mode of setting suggestion effect B. FIG.

In this example, in the AT state and ED state of the advantageous section, in the internal lottery when the start lever 135 is pressed (lever on), a rare combination (in this example, a small combination 1 (watermelon) or a small combination 2 (cherry)) In the case of internal winning, regardless of the operation order (pressing order) or operation timing of the stop operation by the stop buttons 137 to 139, by executing the setting suggestion effect B lottery using the setting suggestion effect B selection table described later. , setting suggestion effect B becomes executable.

The setting suggestion performance B lottery of this example has two types, a low probability mode and a high probability mode in which the probability of executing the setting suggestion performance B is higher than the low probability mode.

The conditions for starting the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode are not particularly limited, but in this example, as shown in FIG. In the state game, a high probability mode is set. Therefore, in this example, the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect B in the ED state is higher than the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect B in the AT state. It should be noted that the execution frequency of the setting suggesting effect B in the AT state may be set to 0%, and the setting suggesting effect B may not be executed in the AT state.

Further, in this example, the execution period of the high-probability mode of the setting suggestion effect B (20 games+α in this example) is at least longer than the execution period of the high-probability mode of the setting suggestion effect A (10 games in this example). also for a long period of time.

Although details will be described later, in the high-probability mode of the setting suggestion effect B, when the rare combination is won, the setting suggestion effect B is always executed. It can be said that the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect is higher than the low probability mode of the setting suggestion effect A having an extremely low execution probability.

In the high-probability mode of the setting suggestion effect B, even if the setting suggestion effect B is executed before the predetermined number of games (20 games+α) elapses, until the end condition of the ED state is satisfied, If the high-probability mode is continued and the conditions for ending the ED state are satisfied and the high-navigation state (advantageous section) shifts to the low-navigation state (normal section), setting-suggestion effects including setting-suggestion effects A and B are performed. When the low navigation state (normal section) shifts to the high navigation state (advantageous section) again without execution, the high probability mode of setting suggestion effect A is set.

According to this example, by providing a high-probability mode period in which the execution probability of the setting suggestion performance is high, which is different from the period of the low-probability mode, the game is immediately terminated (immediately quit) after the period of the low-probability mode ends. It is possible to make it difficult, and it is possible to improve the operating rate.

In addition, in the ED state, even if the player wins the rare role, the additional lottery is not executed. By executing, it is possible to relieve the player's feeling of loss.

It should be noted that the period from the end of the high-probability mode of the setting suggestion effect A to the start of the high-probability mode of the setting suggestion effect B is longer than the period from the end of the high-probability mode of the setting suggestion effect B to the high probability mode of the setting suggestion effect A. It is preferable that the period until the stochastic mode starts (the period shown as the normal section in FIG. 31(a)) is shorter, but it goes without saying that the present invention is not limited to this.

<Setting Suggestion Effect B Selection Table>
FIG. 31(b) is a diagram showing an example of a setting suggestion effect B selection table used for the setting suggestion effect B lottery.

The setting suggesting effect B lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not the setting suggesting effect B is to be executed, and if it is to be executed, the effect contents of the setting suggesting effect B. In this example, when it is determined by the lottery that the setting suggestion effect B is to be executed, the setting suggestion effect B is executed in the game in which the lottery is executed.

The game in which the setting suggestion effect B is executed is not limited to the game in which the setting suggestion effect B lottery is executed, and may be a game after the game in which the setting suggestion effect B lottery is executed.

Among the "effect contents" in the setting suggestion effect B selection table shown in FIG. The contents of the performance B are shown.

In the setting suggestion effect B, the effect is performed using only the sound output from the sound output means (in this example, the speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 26) among the plurality of types of effect elements.

It should be noted that the number of effect elements used in the setting suggesting effect B may be one or more as long as the effect elements used in the setting suggesting effect B are fewer than the effect elements used in the setting suggesting effect A. , sound output means (for example, speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 26), and light output means (for example, backlights of reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 24, side lamps 144 shown in FIG. 24, etc. lamp), movement (eg, vibration, rotation, expansion and contraction, vertical movement) of a movable body (eg, shutter (shielding device) 163 shown in FIG. 24), etc., one, multiple, Alternatively, all can be arbitrarily selected.

Further, the effect content of the setting suggestion effect B is output from the sound output means (in this example, the speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 26) among the effect contents of the setting suggestion effect A described using FIG. 30(b). Since it is the same as the effect performed using the voice that is played, the description thereof is omitted.

<Setting Suggestion Effect B / Low Probability Mode>
In the low-probability mode of the setting suggestion performance B, the lottery data corresponding to the low-probability mode of the setting suggestion performance B selection table is referred to, and whether or not to execute the setting suggestion performance B is executed based on the current set value. If so, the content of the effect of the setting suggestion effect B is determined.

For example, when the current set values are set 1 to set 3, there is a 100% probability that "no execution" is selected and setting suggestion effect B is not executed. If the current set value is set to 4, there is a 99% chance that "no execution" will be selected and the setting suggestion effect B will not be executed, and a 1% chance that the effect content "4 or more confirmed voice" will be selected. A setting suggestion effect B is executed.

If the current set value is set to 5, there is a 98% chance that “no execution” will be selected and the setting suggestion effect B will not be executed, and a 1% chance that the effect content “4 or more confirmed voice” will be selected. The setting suggesting performance B is executed, and the setting suggesting performance B of the performance content ``5 or more confirmed voice'' is executed with a probability of 1%.

If the current setting value is set to 6, there is a 97% chance that "no execution" will be selected and the setting suggestion effect B will not be executed, and a 1% chance that the effect content "4 or more confirmed voice" will be selected. Execute the setting suggestion effect B, execute the setting suggestion effect B of the effect content ``5 or more confirmed voice'' with a probability of 1%, and execute the setting suggestion effect B of the effect content ``6 confirmed voice'' with a probability of 1%. .

<Setting Suggestion Effect B / High Probability Mode>
In the high-probability mode of the setting suggestion performance B, lottery data corresponding to the high-probability mode of the setting suggestion performance B selection table are referred to, and the performance contents of the setting suggestion performance B are determined based on the current set values. In the high-probability mode, the probability that "no execution" is selected is 0% in all of the settings 1 to 6, and the setting suggestion effect B is always executed.

When the current setting value is setting 1, the setting suggestion effect B of the effect content "even number suggestive voice" is executed with a probability of 38%, and the effect content "odd number suggestive voice" is executed with a probability of 57%. The performance B is executed, and the setting suggesting performance B of the performance content ``high setting suggesting voice'' is executed with a probability of 5%.

When the current setting value is setting 2, the setting suggestion effect B of the effect content "even number suggestive voice" is executed with a probability of 57%, and the effect content "odd number suggestive voice" is executed with a probability of 38%. The performance B is executed, and the setting suggesting performance B of the performance content ``high setting suggesting voice'' is executed with a probability of 5%.

If the current set value is set to 3, there is a 37% probability that setting suggestion effect B with the effect content "even number suggestive voice" will be executed, and with a 55% probability, the setting suggestion effect with the effect content "odd number suggestive voice" will be executed. The performance B is executed, and the setting suggesting performance B of the performance content ``high setting suggesting voice'' is executed with a probability of 8%.

When the current set value is set to 4, setting suggestion effect B of the effect content "even number suggestive voice" is executed with a probability of 54%, and setting suggestion effect of the effect content "odd number suggestive voice" is executed with a probability of 36%. The performance B is executed, the setting suggesting performance B of the performance content ``high setting suggesting voice'' is executed with a probability of 8%, and the setting suggesting performance B of the performance content ``4 or more fixed voice'' is executed with a probability of 2%.

When the current set value is set to 5, the setting suggestion effect B of the effect content "even number suggestive voice" is executed with a probability of 34%, and the effect content "odd number suggestive voice" is suggested with a probability of 51%. Execution of effect B, 10% probability of executing setting suggestion effect B of effect content ``high setting suggestive voice'', 3% probability of executing setting suggestion effect B of effect content ``4 or more confirmed voice'', The setting suggesting effect B of the effect content "5 or more confirmed voice" is executed with a probability of 2%.

When the current set value is set to 6, there is a 49% probability that setting suggestion effect B with the effect content "even number suggestive voice" is executed, and with a 33% probability, the setting suggestion effect with the effect content "odd number suggestive voice" is executed. Execution of effect B, 10% probability to execute setting suggestion effect B of effect content “high setting suggestion voice”, 3.5% probability to execute setting suggestion effect B of effect content “4 or more confirmed voice” Then, the setting suggesting effect B of the effect content "5 or more confirmed voice" is executed with a probability of 2.5%, and the setting suggesting effect B of the effect content "6 confirmed voice" is executed with a probability of 2%.

As described above, the first feature of the setting suggestion effect B selection table is that in the high-probability mode, compared to the low-probability mode, the effect ("even number suggestive image", "odd number suggestive image", " High setting suggestive image”) has a high execution probability. By doing so, even in the high-probability mode, it is possible to prevent the player from easily guessing the set value, and it is possible to encourage the player to play for a long period of time.

Also, in the low-probability mode, the execution probability itself is extremely low, so when it is executed, the production that vaguely suggests the setting value ("even number suggestive image", "odd number suggestive image", "high setting suggestive image") is executed. By making the probability low, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being too difficult to guess.

The second feature of the setting suggestion effect B selection table is that in the low probability mode, setting suggestion effect A is more likely to be executed in settings 4 to 6 than in settings 1 to 3. points. By doing so, when the execution probability itself is extremely low, the effect that gives a good impression is executed (the effect that gives a good impression is executed in the case of setting 4 to setting 6). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and encourage the player to play for a long period of time.

It should be noted that the selection probability shown in the setting suggestion effect A selection table of this example is merely an example, and is not limited to the numerical values of this example. For example, in setting 1 to setting 3 of low probability mode, it was not executed, but it may be executed, and in high probability mode, it was always executed, but it is not executed You can make it happen.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that has received this activation signal is reset-started by the reset interrupt and executes the main control section main processing shown in FIG.

When the power is turned on, first, various initial settings are performed in step S101. In this initial setting, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt is disabled, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables to be stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, the WDT 314 is permitted to operate, and the initialization is performed. Set values, etc.

In step S102, bet number setting/start operation acceptance processing is executed. Here, it is checked whether or not medals have been inserted, and preparations are made to send an insert command indicating that the medals have been inserted. When the player wins the replay role in the previous game, the processing of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so the player does not need to insert medals. Further, it is checked whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated, and if the start lever 135 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S103.

In step S103, winning line determination processing is performed to determine the number of inserted medals and to determine an effective winning line.

In step S104, a random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316 is obtained, and internal winning combination lottery processing is performed. In the winning combination internal lottery process, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current game state, and an internal lottery is performed using this and the acquired random number, and the result of this internal lottery is displayed. Prepare to send the internal lottery command to the first sub-controller 400 . As a result of the internal lottery, if any winning combination (including the working combination) is internally won, the flag for that winning combination is turned on.

In step S105, reel stop data selection processing for selecting reel stop data is performed based on the internal lottery result of the winning combination internal lottery processing. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control section 300. FIG. Also, in step S105, preparations are made to transmit a reel stop data command containing information about the selected reel stop data to the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

In step S106, based on the start lever operation, the effect state control processing relating to control of the game state of the AT system described above is executed. In step S107, the process for production|presentation is performed. In this effect processing, control of various effects and the like are performed.

In step S108, reel rotation start processing is executed to start rotation of all the reels 110-112.

In step S109, reel stop control processing is performed. In the reel stop control process, it is possible to accept the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when one of the stop buttons is pressed, a stop table of reel stop data is created in order to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. One of the reels 110 to 112 is stopped according to the number of frames to be drawn set in the stop table. When all the reels 110-112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S110. In this step S109, for each stop operation, a stop button reception command related to the stop button 137 to 139 that has been stopped (more specifically, for the first stop operation, the stop button reception 1 command, the second stop operation, and the for the stop button reception 2 command, and for the third stop operation, prepare to transmit the stop button reception 3 command) to the first sub-control unit 400, and for the stop of each reel, the reel (Specifically, reel stop 1 command for the first stop reel, reel stop 2 command for the second stop operation, reel stop command for the third stop operation 3 command) to the first sub-controller 400.

In step S110, winning determination processing for determining winning is performed. In this winning determination process, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. For example, if "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the activated pay line, it is determined that a small win 3 (Bell) has been won. Also, in this step S110, preparations are made to transmit a prize determination command indicating the result of the prize determination to the first sub-control section 400. FIG.

In step S111, medal awarding processing is performed. In the medal awarding process, if the player wins some winning combination with a payout, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out according to the number of winning lines.

In step S112, game state control processing is performed. In the game state control processing, processing relating to the transition of each game state of the RT system is performed, and the game state is shifted when the start condition or end condition is met. In addition, preparations are made for transmitting a game state command including information indicating the current RT-system game state.

In step S113, an effect state control process relating to control of the game state of the AT system described above is executed. In step S114, a high-navigation state ending process for ending the high-navigation state is executed.

One game is completed by the above. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described processing. Various commands prepared in the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission process (step S206 in FIG. 33) of the main controller timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (about once every 2 ms in this embodiment). Processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S202, the WDT 314 is periodically turned on so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, a restart is performed once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main controller timer interrupt.

In step S203, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I/O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area.

In step S204, various game processes are executed, and processes corresponding to the interrupt status are executed. In step S2005, timer update processing is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated according to their respective time units.

In step S<b>206 , command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 . In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the effect control contents.

In step S207, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334 .

In step S208, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S203, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of an error related to medal insertion abnormality, medal payout abnormality, etc. is monitored. (Not shown) Execute error processing. Further, the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker operated by a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators are set according to the current game state.

In step S209, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If the low-voltage signal is on (power-off is detected), the process proceeds to step S211, and if the low-voltage signal is off (power-off is not detected), the process proceeds to step S210.

In step S210, various processes for ending the timer interrupt ending process are performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S2001 are set in the original registers. After that, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S211, a specific variable and a stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure are saved as return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed. After that, it returns to the main control unit main processing shown in FIG.

<Processing of the first sub-controller>
Next, the processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34(a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 34(b) is a flow chart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 34(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

First, the main processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 34(a).

When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input/output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, the RAM 408 is provided with an area for storing internal winning information representing the result of internal winning and an area for storing RT update information representing the game state.

In step S302, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S3003. In step S303, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S304, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S305, effect control processing is performed. Here, production is prepared according to the production reservation information in the production reservation area provided in the RAM 408 . This preparation includes, for example, performing processing such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406, and performing updating processing of the effect data when the effect data needs to be updated.

In step S306, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command for the sound source IC 418 in the performance data read in step S305, this command is output to the sound source IC 418. In step S307, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command for various lamps 420 in the performance data read out in step S305, this command is output to the drive circuit 422. FIG.

In step S308, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if there is a command to the shutter 163 in the effect data read out in step S305, this command is output to the drive circuit 424. FIG. In step S309, information output processing is performed to set the command to be transmitted to the second sub-controller 500 based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command to be sent to the second sub-controller 500 in the effect data read out in step S305, a setting is made to output this control command, and the process returns to step S302.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 34(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-controller 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main controller 300 . In step S401 of command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the first sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 34(c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S501, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S302 in the first sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 34(a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S302, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10). In step S502, the command is sent to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S309, the random number value for effect is updated, and the like.

<Processing of the second sub-controller>
Next, the processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35(a) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 35(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 35(c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 35(d) is a flowchart of the image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG.

First, in step S601 of FIG. 35(a), various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S601. In this initialization processing, input/output port initialization processing, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, initialization processing of storage areas in the VRAM 536, and the like are performed.

In step S602, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S603. In step S4003, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S604, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S605, effect control processing is performed. Specifically, if there is a new command in step S604, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading effect data for performing image control on a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, processing such as reading other effect data from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In step S606, image control processing (described in detail later) is performed based on the processing result of step S605. For example, if there is an image control instruction in the effect data read in step S605, image control corresponding to this instruction is performed. For example, image control is performed on display images (notification images, background images). When this image control processing ends, the process returns to step S602.

Next, command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 35(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-controller 500 detects the strobe signal output by the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S701 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-controller 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the second sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 35(c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S801, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S602 in the second sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 35(a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S602, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10). In step S802, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control processing of step S606 in the main processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 35(d). This figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S901, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 536 . As a result, the effect image display device 157 displays the one-frame image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM 506), the VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM 536), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 534 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 536. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 534 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 536 based on the command set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 534 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504 .

In step S902, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 534. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S903. Otherwise, a transfer end interrupt signal has been input. wait for

In step S903, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 536 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 536 in step S901, the CPU 504 obtains image data information (coordinate axes of the VRAM 536, image size, etc.) forming the display image. , VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), transparency, etc.) to the VDP 534 . The VDP 534 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S904, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 534 to start drawing an image. The VDP 534 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504 .

In step S905, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 534 based on the end of image rendering. wait for is entered.

In step S906, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Production example 1 of setting suggestion production A>
Next, an effect example 1 of the setting suggestion effect A will be described with reference to FIG. 36A and 36B are diagrams showing the example 1 of the setting suggestion effect A in chronological order.

Rendering example 1 is an rendering example in the case where the internal lottery at the time of pressing operation (lever ON) of the start lever 135 in the game in which the low probability mode of the setting suggestive rendering A is set, the minor winning combination 5 (1 piece winning combination) is internally won. is shown.

The state shown in FIG. 36(a) is the state before the start lever 135 is pressed (lever on).

In this example, the normal effect is displayed in the main display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, the normal BGM is output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the setting suggestion effect A has a low probability in the sub display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. A character C1 (a character of Sabohani in this example) is displayed to suggest that the mode is set.

The state shown in FIG. 36(b) is the state immediately after the start lever 135 is pressed (lever on). In this example, the internal lottery at the time of pressing operation (lever ON) of the start lever 135 internally wins a small winning combination 5 (1-card winning combination).

<Production example 1 of setting suggestion production A / forward press>
The state shown in FIG. 36(c) is a state in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 have been stopped by forward pressing (LCR).

In this example, since the stop buttons 137 to 139 have been operated in the operation order (forward pressing) in which the setting suggestion effect A can be executed, the setting suggestion effect A lottery using the setting suggestion effect A selection table is executed. , it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect A by the lottery.

In addition, since it is decided to execute the setting suggesting effect A in the next game, a treasure box is simulated as a suggesting effect suggesting that the setting suggesting effect A will be executed in the main display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. Character C2 is displayed.

The state shown in FIG. 36(d) is a state in which setting suggestion effect A is executed in the next game. In this example, as the setting suggestion effect A, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 displays a moving image PD1 (4 or more confirmed images) in which rice pops out of an opened treasure chest. BGM (4 or more confirmed voice) is output.

Since the player cannot visually determine the advantage or disadvantage of the AT, it is necessary to encourage the player to play a low-base game in which the AT is advantageous. By executing the setting suggestion effect A, it is possible to encourage (encourage) the player to play a low-base game in which the AT is advantageous. can increase

<Production example 1 of setting suggestion production A / irregular press>
The state shown in FIG. 36(e) is a state in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped by irregular pressing (any of CLR, CRL, RLC, and RCL), and the state shown in FIG. This is the state showing the effect in the next game.

In this example, since the stop buttons 137 to 139 were stopped in an operation sequence (irregular pressing) in which setting suggestion effect A cannot be executed, setting suggestion effect A (movie PD1 in this example) and setting suggestion effect None of the suggestive effects (character C2 in this example) suggesting that the effect A will be executed is executed.

If the setting suggestion effect A is executed by an irregular push that results in a high base game, the player can see through the setting while suppressing the number of medals to be inserted. Since the setting suggesting effect A is not executed by pressing, it is possible to prevent the setting from being seen through a high base game, and to encourage (encourage) the player to play a low base game.

<Production example 2 of setting suggestion production A>
Next, an effect example 2 of the setting suggestion effect A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing example 2 of effect of setting suggestion effect A in chronological order.

Rendering example 2 is an rendering example in the case where the internal lottery at the time of pressing operation (lever ON) of the start lever 135 in the game in which the high probability mode of the setting suggestive rendering A is set, the small winning combination 5 (1 piece winning combination) is internally won. is shown.

The state shown in FIG. 37(a) is the state immediately after the start lever 135 is pressed (lever ON).

In this example, the normal effect is displayed in the main display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, normal BGM is output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the setting suggestion effect A is produced in the sub display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 with a high probability. A character C3 (in this example, a Savohani character covered with an aura image) is displayed to suggest that the mode is set.
In this example, the internal lottery at the time of pressing operation (lever ON) of the start lever 135 internally wins a small winning combination 5 (1-card winning combination).

<Production example 2 of setting suggestion production A / forward press>
The state shown in FIG. 37(b) is a state in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 have been stopped by forward pressing (LCR).

In this example, since the stop buttons 137 to 139 have been operated in the operation order (forward pressing) in which the setting suggestion effect A can be executed, the setting suggestion effect A lottery using the setting suggestion effect A selection table is executed. , it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect A by the lottery.

In addition, since it is decided to execute the setting suggesting effect A in the next game, a treasure box is simulated as a suggesting effect suggesting that the setting suggesting effect A will be executed in the main display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. Character C2 is displayed.

The state shown in FIG. 37(c) is a state in which setting suggestion effect A is executed in the next game.

In this example, as the setting suggestion effect A, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 displays a moving image PD2 (5 or more confirmed images) in which a panda character jumps out of an opened treasure chest. Dedicated BGM (5 or more confirmed voice) is output.

Since the player cannot visually determine the advantage or disadvantage of the AT, it is necessary to encourage the player to play a low-base game in which the AT is advantageous. By executing the setting suggestion effect A, it is possible to encourage (encourage) the player to play a low-base game in which the AT is advantageous. can increase

FIG. 37(d) shows a state in which the setting suggestion effect A is ended and the high probability mode of the setting suggestion effect A is shifted to the low probability mode.

In this example, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed after the display of the setting suggestion effect A started, the setting suggestion effect A is ended, and the normal effect is displayed in the main display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. , normal BGM is output from the speakers 272 and 277, and in the sub-display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, a character C1 indicating that the low probability mode of the setting suggestion effect A is set (in this example, Sabohani's character) is displayed.

<Production example 2 of setting suggestion production A / irregular press>
The state shown in FIG. 37(e) is a state in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped by irregular pressing (any of CLR, CRL, RLC, and RCL), and the state shown in FIG. This is the state showing the effect in the next game.

In this example, since the stop buttons 137 to 139 were stopped in an operation sequence (irregular pressing) in which setting suggestion effect A cannot be executed, setting suggestion effect A (movie PD2 in this example) and setting suggestion effect None of the suggestive effects (character C2 in this example) suggesting that the effect A will be executed is executed.

If the setting suggestion effect A is executed by an irregular push that results in a high base game, the player can see through the setting while suppressing the number of medals to be inserted. Since the setting suggesting effect A is not executed by pressing, it is possible to prevent the setting from being seen through a high base game, and to encourage (encourage) the player to play a low base game.

In this example, when the stop button 137 to 139 is stopped by an irregular press (any of CLR, CRL, RLC, and RCL), the high probability mode of the setting suggestion effect A is continued, and the high probability mode is set (in this example, the character of Sabohani covered with an aura image) continues to be displayed, but with the stop operation of the irregular pressing as a trigger, the high probability mode of the setting suggestion effect A to the low probability mode.

In addition, in the setting suggestion effect A of this example, the BGM dedicated to the setting suggestion effect A is also changed according to the setting suggestion image, but the common BGM dedicated to the setting suggestion effect A is output regardless of which setting suggestion image is displayed. You can make it work. That is, in this case, the BGM dedicated to the setting suggestion effect A is the BGM for notifying that the setting suggestion effect A is being executed.

Also, the setting suggestion effect A of this example is not executed in the AT state or the ED state, but it may be executed in the AT state or the ED state.

<Production example of setting suggestion production B>
Next, an example of the effect of setting suggestion effect B will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 38 is a diagram showing an example of the effect of the setting suggestion effect B in chronological order.

This example of effect is an example of effect in the case where the internal lottery at the time of pressing operation (lever ON) of the start lever 135 in the game in which the high-probability mode of the setting suggestion effect B is set, the small winning combination 5 (1 piece winning combination) is internally won. is shown.

The states shown in FIGS. 38(a) to 38(c) are AT states in the advantageous section. In the state shown in FIG. 38(a), the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 indicates that the number of games remaining in the advantageous section is 201 games, and the BGM during AT is output from the speakers 272 and 277. .

In the subsequent state shown in FIG. 14B, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 informs that the number of games remaining in the advantageous section is 200 games, and the BGM during AT is output from the speakers 272 and 277. there is

In the subsequent state shown in FIG. 4(c), in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, the shift to the ED state from the next game is notified, and BGM during AT is output from the speakers 272 and 277. FIG.

On the other hand, the states shown in FIGS. 38(d) to 38(f) are ED states in the advantageous section. In the state shown in FIG. 38( d ), in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 , the ED effect is executed and the BGM during the ED is output from the speakers 272 and 277 .

In the subsequent state shown in (e) of the same figure, the internal lottery at the time of pressing operation (lever ON) of the start lever 135 has internally won a rare combination (in this example, a small combination 1 (watermelon)), so setting suggestion production B A setting suggestion effect B lottery using the selection table is executed, and it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect B by the lottery, and as the setting suggestion effect B, BGM dedicated to the setting suggestion effect B is played from the speakers 272 and 277 (this example , 4 or more definite voices) are output.

In the subsequent state shown in (f) of the same figure, since the internal lottery at the time of pressing operation (lever ON) of the start lever 135 has internally won a rare combination (in this example, a small combination 2 (cherry)), setting suggestion production B A setting suggestion effect B lottery using the selection table is executed, and it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect B by the lottery, and as the setting suggestion effect B, BGM dedicated to the setting suggestion effect B is played from the speakers 272 and 277 (this example at high setting (suggestive voice) is output.

According to this example, by executing the setting suggestion effect B, it is possible to suggest the setting value, so that the player's interest can be heightened. In addition, since it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect B (second setting suggestion effect) that suggests the currently set setting value, which is different from the setting suggestion effect A (first setting suggestion effect), the setting suggestion effect Variations can be increased, and expectations and interest in setting suggestive effects can be increased.

In addition, according to this example, there is a high possibility that more setting suggestion effects will be executed than in the low probability mode of setting suggestion effects, so by performing setting suggestion effects with a small number of effect elements, setting suggestion effects can be felt annoying. can be prevented. In addition, it is possible to prevent interference with other effects in the ED state, perform various effects, and improve the amusement of the game. In addition, in the ED state, even if the player wins the rare role, the additional lottery is not executed. By executing, it is possible to relieve the player's feeling of loss.

In this example, in addition to the BGM during the ED, the BGM dedicated to the setting suggestion effect B is output from the speakers 272 and 277, but only the BGM dedicated to the setting suggestion effect B is output instead of the BGM during the ED. can be configured to

Also, the setting suggesting effect B of this example is executed in the AT state and the ED state, but it may be executed in states other than the AT state and the ED state, or may be executed only in the ED state. Also good.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present example (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) has a plurality of reels (for example, the reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. ), a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and a plurality of set values setting means (for example, setting key, setting switch) capable of setting one of setting values (for example, setting 1 to setting 6); and lottery information corresponding to the plurality of setting values set by the setting means internal lottery means (for example, winning combination internal lottery processing shown in FIG. 32) for deriving the result of the internal lottery based on the lottery result derived by the internal lottery means after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven. stop control means (for example, reel stop control processing shown in FIG. 32) for stopping the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation is performed, and the plurality of reels stopped by the stop control means. Game value imparting means (for example, medal payout processing shown in FIG. 32) for imparting game value (for example, medals) according to the stop mode of the reels, and controlling the progress of the game to improve the ease of acquiring the game value. Changeable game control means (for example, game state control processing shown in FIG. 32) and production control means for executing production according to the progress of the game (for example, the first sub-control unit 400 shown in FIG. A game machine comprising a control unit 500), wherein the game control means controls a first game state (for example, normal game state) and a second game state different from the first game state (for example, , AT state) can be set from a plurality of game states, and the first condition is satisfied while the first game state is set (for example, winning the AT lottery It is possible to end the first game state and set the second game state, based on the result of the player's operation of the stop button in the first game state, Means for changing the ease of obtaining the game value in the second game state set after the first condition is satisfied, wherein the stop control means selects the first game value by the internal lottery means. A lottery result (for example, any of the small winning combination 3b (pushing order bell RLC), small winning combination 3c (pushing order bell CRL), small winning combination 3e (pushing order bell CLR), and small winning combination 3f (pushing order bell RCL)) is derived. In the played game, the stop button is the first operation operation (for example, forward pressing (LCR), scissors hitting (LRC)), the plurality of reels are operated in a first stop mode (for example, a symbol combination other than "bell symbol-bell symbol-bell symbol"). ), and in the game in which the first lottery result is derived, when the stop button is operated by a second operation (for example, an irregular press (any of CLR, CRL, RLC, RCL)) , means for stopping the plurality of reels in a second stop mode (for example, a symbol combination of "bell pattern - bell pattern - bell pattern"), and the gaming value imparting means causes the plurality of reels to stop in the first When the game is stopped in the second stop mode (for example, 12 medals are paid out) than when the game is stopped in the second stop mode (for example, 1 medal is paid out), more game value is given. and the game control means derives the first lottery result in the first game state, and when the plurality of reels stop in the second stop mode, the first The first lottery result is derived in the gaming state, and the second game set after the first condition is satisfied than when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode If the ease of acquiring the game value in the state is disadvantageous to the player (for example, in the game where the stop operation is performed by irregular pressing in the normal game, AT lottery is not executed, or one set game of AT game The number of irregular pushes is reduced, the number of initial games and the probability of addition at the time of winning the AT are disadvantageous depending on the number of irregular pushes, the lottery for each game point is performed, and the performance of the AT is determined according to the points. In that case, the point lottery will be disadvantageous, the probability of winning the AT lottery will be reduced in the game where the stop operation is performed by irregular pressing in the normal game, the execution frequency of operation navigation in the AT game will be reduced, and the set will continue in the AT game. No lottery is executed, the winning probability of the set continuation lottery is lowered in AT games, etc.) (or it is always changed to a disadvantage), and the effect control means is a game in which the second condition is established (for example, a small winning combination 5 (a game in which an internal win is made for 1 card)), if the stop button is operated by the first operation, a first setting suggestion effect that suggests the currently set value (for example, the 36(e) and a setting suggestion effect A (movie PD2) shown in FIG. 37(c)). .

Since the player cannot visually determine the advantage or disadvantage of the AT, it is necessary to encourage the player to play a low-base game in which the AT has an advantage. By doing so, it is possible to encourage (encourage) the player to play a low-base game in which the AT is advantageous, and it is possible to suggest a set value, so that the player's interest can be enhanced. .

It should be noted that the "condition for fulfilling the second condition" according to the present invention is not limited to internal winning of a winning combination, but winning a certain winning combination, a certain gaming state (for example, an ED state in an advantageous section). , winning a certain lottery, executing a certain effect (for example, a continuous effect), and the like.

Further, the effect control means does not execute the first setting suggestion effect (or may not be implemented).

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting detection by the high-base game from being performed, and to encourage (encourage) the player to play the low-base game.

The second condition may include the fact that the internal lottery means derives a second lottery result (for example, a small combination of 5 (1-card combination)). is only for adjusting the base, it is not possible to change the winning probability in order to adjust the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect, and the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect becomes too high or low. However, if the second condition includes the fact that the second lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means, the winning role that adjusts the base can be used as a condition for executing the setting suggestion effect. It is possible to easily adjust the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect by using the winning combination different from the winning combination.

Further, the first setting suggestion effect may be an effect executable in the first game state.

Even if the first setting suggestion effect is executed during AT, the advantage and disadvantage of AT are already determined during AT, and the timing is late to encourage low base games, so it is necessary to execute in normal games. However, if the first setting-suggesting effect is an effect that can be executed in the first game state, the first setting-suggesting effect is an effect that also includes the effect of encouraging low-base games in which the AT is advantageous. Therefore, by executing it in the normal game before the AT, it is possible to more effectively encourage the low-base game in which the AT is advantageous.

In addition, the effect control means provides a second setting suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect B shown in FIG. (4 or more confirmed voices)).

With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the variation of the setting suggesting effect, and to increase the expectation and interest in the setting suggesting effect.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present example (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) includes a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 1) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate, A plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1) provided corresponding to each of a plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and a plurality of setting values (for example, setting 1 to setting 6), a setting means (for example, a setting key, a setting switch) capable of setting one setting value, and a lottery information corresponding to the plurality of setting values set by the setting means After the internal lottery means for deriving the result of winning (for example, winning combination internal lottery process shown in FIG. 32) and the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, the lottery is stopped based on the lottery result derived by the internal lottery means. Stop control means for stopping the reel corresponding to the operated stop button (for example, reel stop control processing shown in FIG. 32), and production control means for executing production according to the progress of the game (for example, , the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 shown in FIG. 26), wherein the effect control means provides a setting suggestion effect (for example, FIG. 36 (e) 37(c), setting suggestion effect A (video PD2) shown in FIG. The setting suggestion effect is displayed by an effect element (for example, a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 24) or output from a sound output means (for example, speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 26). sound, light output from light output means (for example, the backlight of the reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 24, lamps such as the side lamp 144 shown in FIG. 24), and a movable body (for example, the shutter shown in FIG. (Shielding device) 163) (for example, vibration, rotation, expansion and contraction, vertical movement, etc.) is used to produce an effect that suggests the currently set value.

According to the amusement machine according to this example, it is possible to suggest the currently set setting value by the setting suggestion effect using the effect element, so that the player's interest is increased and the operating rate can be improved. can.

In addition, the predetermined period includes a first period (for example, the period of the low probability mode of the setting suggestion effect A shown in FIG. 30(a)) and a second period different from the first period (for example, non 10 games after transition from the advantageous interval to the advantageous interval (period of high probability mode of setting suggestion effect A shown in FIG. The second period may be easier to implement. Note that the "first period" according to the present invention may be a period during which the setting suggestion effect is less likely to be executed than the "second period", and may be a period during which the setting suggestion is not executed.

With such a configuration, by providing the second period, which is different from the first period and in which the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect is high, it is difficult to end the game immediately (immediately quit) after the end of the first period. It is possible to improve the operating rate.

In addition, a game control means (for example, game state control processing shown in FIG. 32) that controls the progress of the game and can change the easiness of acquiring the game value is provided, and the game control means is the first game It is possible to set one game state from a plurality of game states including at least a state (for example, normal game state) and a second game state (for example, AT state) different from the first game state, and the first game state When the first condition is satisfied in the state in which the game state is set (for example, winning the AT lottery), the first game state is terminated and the second game state is set. The second period may be set before the first period after the second game state is finished.

With such a configuration, after the second game state advantageous to the player ends, the second period in which the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect is high is set, so that the game can be played after the second game state ends. can be made difficult to immediately end (immediately quit), and the operating rate can be improved.

Further, the predetermined period is a third period different from the first period and the second period (for example, 20 games in the ED state shown in FIG. 31(a) (high probability mode of setting suggestion effect B). period), and the setting suggestion effect is executed in the third period rather than the first period (for example, the low probability mode period of the setting suggestion effect A shown in FIG. 30(a)). The third period is longer than the second period (for example, 10 games after transition from the non-advantageous interval to the advantageous interval (the high-probability mode period of the setting suggestion effect A shown in FIG. 30(a))). The effect element (for example, the liquid crystal display shown in FIG. 37(c)) is used in the setting suggestion effect (for example, the setting suggestion effect A (movie PD2) shown in FIG. 37(c)) in the second period. Display by device 157 and audio output from speakers 272 and 277) used in setting suggestion effect (for example, setting suggestion effect B (4 or more confirmed sound) shown in FIG. 38E) in the third period There may be fewer production elements (for example, only sounds output from the speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIGS. 38(e) and 38(f)).

With such a configuration, the third period is longer than the second period, and there is a high possibility that more setting suggestion effects will be executed than during the second period, so it is set with fewer effect elements. By performing the suggestive effect, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestive effect from being bothersome. In addition, it is possible to prevent interference with other effects during the third period, perform various effects, and improve the amusement of the game.

Also, the game machine according to the present invention can be applied to an enclosed game machine. Here, the "enclosed game machine" is one that circulates game balls enclosed in the game machine. Further, the main control unit, the first sub-control unit, and the second sub-control unit may be configured on a single chip, or the main control unit and the first sub-control unit may be configured to allow two-way communication. good. Further, while bi-directional communication is enabled between the main control section and the first sub-control section, communication from the first sub-control section to the second sub-control section may be unidirectional communication.

Moreover, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely enumerations of the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. are not limited to those listed. Further, by applying the content described in one configuration among the multiple configurations described in the embodiments to another configuration, the width of the game may be expanded.

The game machine according to the present invention can be applied to a game machine represented by a pinball game machine (pachinko machine), a reel game machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine. can.

100 slot machine 110-112 reel 113 symbol display window 130-132 bet button 135 start lever 137-139 stop button 157 liquid crystal display device

Claims (2)

performance means and
A door body that is provided on the front of the game table and can be opened and closed,
a detecting means capable of detecting the open/closed state of the door;
an operating means capable of performing an operation;
a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of patterns are applied and driven to rotate;
a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping rotation of the reels;
A game machine comprising
The production means is capable of executing a game production,
The effect means is capable of executing a winning effect according to the stop state of the plurality of reels,
The detection means is means capable of changing the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state,
The detection means is means capable of changing the detection state to an open detection state when the door body is in an open state,
By performing a predetermined operation on the detection means, the detection state of the detection means is set to the closed detection state even when the door body is in the open state,
The rendering means includes display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a management display for an administrator,
When the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state (hereinafter referred to as "first state"), when the certain operation is performed, the management display is displayed. is configured to be able to start
The management display is configured not to start displaying even if the certain operation is performed in the first state in which the reel is rotating,
When the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode by the stop button in the first state and the state in which the reels are rotating and the certain operation is being performed, the is configured to start showing administrative views, and
When the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode by the stop button in the first state and the state in which the reels are rotating and the certain operation is being performed, After the winning effect is executed to the end and terminated , the management display is started, and the game effect is interrupted along with the start of the management display .
A playground characterized by: The game machine according to claim 1,
Even if the detection state of the detecting means changes from the open detection state to the closed detection state while the management display is being displayed, the display of the management display is continued. and
The directing means includes light emitting means,
The light emitting means is capable of emitting light in a first light emitting mode when a game is possible and the detection state of the detecting means is the open detection state,
The light-emitting means is capable of emitting light in the first light-emitting mode while the management display is being displayed and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state,
The light emitting means is capable of emitting light in a second light emitting mode when a game is possible and the detection state of the detecting means is the closed detection state,
The light emitting means is extinguished when the management display is being displayed and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state.
A playground characterized by:

Images